JP2018175139A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: As a type of a privilege game, a type of one privilege game is determined by type determination means from among a plurality of games including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game which becomes a specific determination result with determination by second determination means during a period until satisfaction of a specific condition from the end of the privilege game more easily, than the first privilege game. As the game state after the privilege game is terminated, one game state is set by game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least the first game state and the second game state different from the first game state. In the first privilege game and the second privilege game, the setting ratio in the second game state is higher than that in the second game state, as the game state after the privilege game is completed. Thereby, it is possible to increase a player's interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 92

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of types of hitting types different in the number of rounds are provided, and there are those in which the interest in the game is improved by making the obtainable game value different.

Patent 2514417 gazette

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest in the game because the difference in the degree of advantage for each hit type is small.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a first discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. Based on the fact that the determination by the second determining means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the above, the determination by the first determining means, or the determination by the second determining means results in a special advantage for the player As a type of the bonus game executing means for executing the game and the type of the bonus game performed by the bonus game executing means, the first bonus game and the first bonus game, the specific condition after the bonus game is over Type determination means for determining the type of one of the plurality of bonus games from among a plurality of second bonus games which are likely to result in the particular determination result by the second determination means until the establishment of The bonus game is The game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state as the game state after the ending, The setting ratio of the first gaming state is higher than the second gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game, as the first bonus game and the second bonus game. .

  The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein the type determination means is more effective for the player than the types of the first bonus game, the second bonus game, and the other bonus games. The type of one of the plurality of bonus games is determined from among the plurality including the disadvantageous third bonus game, and the third bonus game is the second determination than the determination by the first determination unit. The ratio determined by the type determination means is high when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first gaming state is determined by the first determining means or by the second determining means. The probability that the specific determination result is obtained is higher than that of the second gaming state, and between the end of the second benefit game and the establishment of the specific condition is higher than the first determination condition. The second determination condition is more easily established.

  A gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein discrimination information for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. The acquisition means, the discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit, and the one discrimination information of 1 stored in the discrimination information storage means And an erasing unit that erases the one determination information from the determination information storage unit based on the determination by the second determination unit, and the specific condition is stored in the determination information storage unit. This is established based on the fact that the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information has become zero.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, there is provided the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, wherein the first ball entering means is disposed at a position where the gaming ball fired in the first direction can enter. And a second entering means disposed at a position where the game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter, and the first determination condition is the first entering means. The second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball. In the second bonus game, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction at least for a predetermined period after the start of the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the determination is performed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is made based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. 2 Discrimination is executed by the discrimination means. Based on the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means that a specific determination result is obtained, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. As a type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game executing means, the first bonus game and the first bonus game, discrimination by the second discriminator between the end of the bonus game and the establishment of the specific condition The type of one benefit game is selected by the type determination means from among a plurality of the second benefit games that are likely to result in a specific determination result. As a game state after the end of the bonus game, one game state is set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of first game states and a second game state different from the first game state. . In both the first bonus game and the second bonus game, the setting ratio of the first gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game.

  As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the type of the one bonus game among the plurality including at least the first bonus game, the second bonus game, and the third bonus game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the other bonus game types is the type determination means Determined by The rate at which the third bonus game is determined by the type determination means is higher when the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result than the determination by the first determination means.

  As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means, the rate at which the disadvantageous third bonus game is determined is high, and it is hoped that the determination by the second determination means does not result in the specific determination result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform the game expecting to become the first benefit game, rather than becoming the second benefit game that is likely to be a specific determination result by the determination by the second determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, the following effect is exerted. That is, the first gaming state is configured such that the probability of being a specific discrimination result is higher than that of the second gaming state when the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed. . Between the end of the second benefit game and the establishment of the specific condition, the second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition.

  As a result, in the first gaming state, the probability of being a specific determination result is higher than in the second gaming state, so it becomes easy to become a bonus game continuously at relatively short intervals. As a result, when the first gaming state is reached, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effects can be achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information acquisition means acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means. Discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit. Based on the fact that one piece of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, the discrimination information of the one is erased from the discrimination information storage means by the erasing means. The specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes zero.

  As a result, since it is easy for the second determination means to make a specific determination result until the number of information in the determination information becomes 0, the game is played by paying attention to the number of information stored in the determination information storage means. It has the effect of being able to

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the first ball entering means is disposed at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball. The second ball entering means is disposed at a position where the game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. While the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, the second determination condition is that the game ball enters the second ball entry means It is established based on In the second bonus game, it is more advantageous for the player to fire the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction at least for a predetermined period after the start of the bonus game.

  Thereby, when it becomes the second bonus game, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entering means by firing the game ball in the second direction in a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the second determination condition is easily established after the end of the bonus game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a variable winning prize apparatus. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 65 in the La-La line of FIG.5 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 65 in the Lb-Lb line of FIG.5 (c) (C) is a top view of the variable winning device 65. (A) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the switching member is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path, (b) is a flow path solenoid inoperative, special It is a rear view of the back cover body which shows the state which the induction | guidance | derivation piece of the switching member has blocked the opening surface of the entrance of a discharge flow path. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of 3 symbol display devices in a 1st embodiment, (b) is an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a jackpot displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a ball hitting a second ball entrance during a jackpot It is the model which showed an example of the display mode at the time of detecting. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of door breakthrough mode presentation performed with a start of an ending period after all the rounds of a big hit end in a 1st embodiment, (b) These are the schematic diagrams which showed an example of the display mode at the time of breaking through the 1st door in door breakthrough mode production | presentation. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when failing to break through the fourth door in the door breakthrough mode effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when it is successful to break through all the doors in the door breakthrough mode effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the display mode when shifting to the definite variation mode and the state of the specific winning opening, (b) is the second holding ball of the second special symbol It becomes the jackpot F, and is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the display mode in the case of shifting to the normal mode and the state of the specific winning a prize opening. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment It is the figure which showed the prescription content typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st contact classification selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is main control in 1st Embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd per random number table set to ROM of an apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically illustrates the definition content of the special table per table (C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table for the special figure 1 (normal) table, and (d) is the specification for the special figure 1 (positive variation) table It is the figure which showed the content typically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for the special figure 2 big hit (4 variations or less) table, (b) is a schematic drawing of the contents for the special figure 2 big hit (5 variations or more) table (C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for the special figure 2 off (4 variations or less) table, and (d) is the special figure 2 off (5 variations or more It is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the table for. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the transition method of the state in 1st Embodiment typically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment . It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit inside winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize information command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting end time processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows stop classification command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a round performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed several command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. Is a flowchart showing an error command process. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is executed by MPU in the display control in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment It is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st contact classification selection table set to ROM of (4). It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd per random number table set to ROM of the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the transition method of the state in 2nd Embodiment typically. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows state determination processing at the time of closing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the breakthrough mode selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the case where a storage valve is in a projection state (The state where three balls which is the upper limit number are stored above the storage valve) in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. In the modification of a 2nd embodiment, (b) is a figure which illustrated the case where a storage valve is in a state of being buried. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the opening of the jackpot displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 3rd embodiment, (b) is a 3rd symbol display device in a 3rd embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in 1 round of the jackpot displayed with. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the end of one round of a jackpot displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol in the third embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in the interval after one round of the jackpot displayed with a display apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, (b) is a first contact type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the prescription content of. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the open scenario selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a promotion effect lottery table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment FIG. 7C is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the definition of FIG. 7C, and FIG. 7C is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the open scenario selection process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot related processing 3 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the promotion production lottery process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode under reach out during the opening of the big hit displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of a 3rd embodiment, and (b) is the 3rd example It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display aspect of the 1st round of the jackpot displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the modification of a form. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the time-dependent change of the effect mode in the case of becoming a big hit in the modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a super in the modification of the third embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of reach-out. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st contact classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a table of the special hit back hit table in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the prescription content typically, and (c) is a figure showing typically the prescription content of the table for special hit back deviation in a 4th embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and ball inlets 64, 640, 67, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, in the case of changing the effect or the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot or the predetermined reach, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In addition, although it was set as the above-mentioned structure in this embodiment, not only it but the main control apparatus 110 or the structure from which the other control apparatus detects the game ball shot by ball firing unit 112a May be configured to detect that the game ball has been fired. In addition, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails and a windmill for guiding balls, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the distributing member 660, the variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is being fixed by a wood screw etc. from the front side of 13. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a start opening is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area). Further, the game area includes all areas where the game ball having passed through the return ball preventing member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 and the winning opening.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a drawing of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the ball is normally entered When it passes 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is judged whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit If it is determined, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is usually closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or seven balls are won ) The release is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As the jackpot type of the special symbol, six types of “jackpot A” to “jackpot F” are provided, and after the end of the special game state, on the game according to the result of the jackpot game as added value after the jackpot end The player's value (game value) is given to the player. In addition, three kinds of "big hit A-C" are the big hit types which can be determined when it becomes a big hit in the lottery executed triggered by the ball entering the first entrance 64, " The three types of jackpots D to F are jackpot types that can be determined in the case where a jackpot occurs in a lottery that is triggered by the ball entering the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, the drawing of the special symbol lottery executed upon the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol drawing, and the ball enters the second inlet. The lottery of the special symbol to be executed triggered by entering the ball opening 640 is referred to as the lottery of the second special symbol.

  When a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds, etc.) elapses, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entering the ball is for each type of entrance. The number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81, up to four times each. When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the ordinary ball entry port 67, it is determined whether the regular symbol is hit or not. When the normal symbol comes into contact, the first ball entrance 64 is changed by changing the motorized part 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). It is released. In the normal state, since the motorized accessory 64a is disposed at the closing position, the front right side and the left side of the first ball inlet 64 are closed. Therefore, it is impossible to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by blocking the electric ball 64a from the right side and the left side of the front view toward the first ball entrance 64 by the electric symbol 64a ). Therefore, basically, only the ball that has flowed down vertically from the front view in the vertical direction with respect to the first ball entrance 64 can basically enter the first ball entrance 64 basically. On the other hand, when it comes to a hit of the normal symbol, the ball rolled from the right side and the left side in the front view toward the first ball entrance 64 by opening the motorized part 64a is the first ball entrance 64 As a result, it becomes easier to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37 While being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the normal ball entry port 67 remains, the lottery of the next normal symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery is It is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided.

When it comes to "big hit A" and "big hit D", the special gaming state (16 round big hit) of which the number of rounds is 16 rounds. On the other hand, if it becomes "big hit B", the number of rounds will be 5 rounds of special gaming state (5 rounds big hit), and if it becomes "big hit C", the number of rounds will be 2 rounds of special gaming state, "big hit E", When the number of rounds is 7 rounds of special game state (7 rounds jackpot) and becomes "big hit F", the number of rounds is 6 rounds special game state (6 rounds jackpot). Furthermore, when the specific conditions are satisfied during each of the above jackpot games (when the ball entering the variable winning device 65 passes the probability change switch 65e3 described later), the special symbol high probability state (special Transition to the symbol). In addition, when a high probability state of special symbol is given,
The hit probability of the normal symbol is also increased (a time-shortened state of the normal symbol is given). The special symbol high probability state and the regular symbol time saving state continue from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the big hit game), it becomes the low probability state of the special symbol until the next big hit, and the normal symbol is hit The probability is also the normal probability (normally the normal state of the symbol).

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (special variation of the special symbol state), in other words, the special gaming state It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", it is a state where jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of special symbol, that is, jackpot probability of special symbol is normal Indicates the condition (low probability condition of special symbol). In addition, the “time saving state of the normal symbol” (the high probability state of the normal symbol) refers to a gaming state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 because the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state" is called "ordinary symbol normal state" (ordinary symbol low probability state), this means that the symbol probability of normal symbol is normal state, ie, more than time saving Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  Hereinafter, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit of the special symbol is referred to as a special variation period of the special symbol. In addition, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol after the big hit of the special symbol is referred to as the short-term time of the normal symbol.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is varied according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all the jackpot types (for example, all five rounds). Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which continues until the big hit of "the probability variation state of a special symbol" and "the time saving state of a normal symbol" provided after a big hit will be next, it is not restricted to this. For example, the "special symbol random variation state" and the "normal symbol short time state" may be configured to be limited to the number of times the special symbol lottery number is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of times of drawing in which the "special symbol is in a certain variation state" may be different from the number of times of drawing in which the "time saving state of a normal symbol" is performed. Further, the number of times of drawing may be varied according to the type of the jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the "special symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol normal state" are always set. And when it becomes a big hit, and the ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3 in the big hit, it moves from "the low probability state of the special symbol" to "the positive variation state of the special symbol" and from "the normal state of the normal symbol" Move to "Normal pattern time reduction state". In this case, the set "special symbol oddity state" and "normal symbol short time state" continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, if the ball has never passed through the probability change switch 65e3 at one jackpot, it shifts to "the special symbol low probability state" and "the normal symbol normal state". The details will be described later, but in the first embodiment, when "big hit A to D", the ball easily passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the big hit, and when "big hit E, F", the big hit It becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, because it will be either "jackpot A ~ C", after the end of the jackpot is likely to be "time symbol state of special symbols" and "time symbol state of ordinary symbols". On the other hand, if it becomes a jackpot by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, it will become either of "jacks D to F". Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the ratio of “big hit D” is 5% when the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. Therefore, if it becomes a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, it will be "big hit E, F" with high probability (percent of 95%), so the "special symbol low probability state" which is disadvantageous for the player after the big hit ends And there is a high possibility of becoming a "normal condition of the symbol". Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the lottery of the first special symbol.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation A special symbol (first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by a lighted state as a stop symbol after termination, or a ball entered into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first design) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the entrance of the ball The number of times is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be suspended up to four times each, but the maximum number of times is limited to four times It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (special symbol according to big hit A to F (First pattern) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 is triggered by it. To be executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 7 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 7 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured to imitate the numbers "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) to be described later is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. A jackpot is generated after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower two, and about 4/5 on the upper side is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower 1/5 of the lower display area Ds is a sub display area Ds for displaying the number of holding balls, a notice character and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 0.5 seconds. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds or more), it is determined whether the player is the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is It can be suppressed that the jackpot is overlooked. In addition, if the combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbol which is stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the removal and there is a holding ball, after the stop display, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started. In addition, when several holding balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest entering ball in time. Furthermore, when there are both a holding ball corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a holding ball corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the lottery based on the second special symbol holding ball has priority. To be executed.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in the state where the holding ball is not present, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, or a new ball enters for either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the ball into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 despite the fact that the player continuously launches the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 does not play a game at all because the player quits playing the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. Do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being performed or not based on the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the new entrance is accepted. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and among the spheres entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, a sphere of which variation has not been executed yet The number of holding balls, which is the number of (holding balls), is displayed by the number of holding symbols indicating each holding ball.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 7B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a maximum of four reserved symbols displayed as black circles are displayed on the right side and the left side in front view. The holding symbol displayed on the right in front view is the holding symbol (first holding symbol) corresponding to the drawing of the first special symbol, and the holding symbol displayed on the right in front view corresponds to the drawing of the second special symbol It is a holding symbol (second holding symbol). FIG. 7 (b) exemplifies a case in which three first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank). There is.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball entering to the 1st ball entrance 64 and the 2nd ball entrance 640 may each be hold | held to a maximum of 4 times, the maximum holding ball number is 4 times The number of times is not limited, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, instead of displaying the number of holding balls by the number of holding symbols, the number of holding balls is a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number, or the area divided into four by the number of holding balls It may be displayed in different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol which is performed as a ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67 is being executed by a lighting state, As a stop symbol after completion, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighted state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes either the left or right normal entry port 67, the symbol of "o" and "x" as the normal symbol (the second symbol) A variable display is performed to turn on the symbols alternately. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second entrance 640 only for a predetermined time As a result, the ball enters the second ball inlet 640 easily. The number of times the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, passage of the ball in the normal ball entry port 67 is not limited to 4 times the maximum number of holding balls, similarly to the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, three times or less, or , 5 or more times (for example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter. The first ball entrance 64 is provided with a pair of motorized jacks 64a that can be opened and closed respectively on the left and right, and when the motorized jack 64a is in the open state, vertically above the first ball entrance 64 In addition to the balls that flowed down, the balls that flowed down from the left and right can also enter the ball. The first ball entry port 64 is a ball (a left-handed ball) which has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 regardless of whether or not the motorized accessory 64a is in the open state. A nail or the like is disposed so that the user can enter the ball more easily than the ball (ball hit right) which has flowed down the right channel of the variable display unit 80.

  A second ball entry port 640 where a ball can enter the ball is disposed on the upper right side in a front view with respect to the first ball entry port 64. When the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second ball entry port 640 is also one of the winning openings in which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when the ball enters the ball. As shown in FIG. 2, since the second ball entry port 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, basically the ball entering the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 flows down However, it is easier to enter the ball than the ball flowing down the flow path provided in the left direction of the variable display unit 80.

  The variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on to become a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a large amount of winning balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or seven balls have been won). That is, the open / close door 65f1 closing the specified winning combination opening 65a is normally opened by becoming a big hit, and the ball can enter the specified winning combination opening 65a. The specific winning hole 65a and the second entry hole 640 are positions where a ball (a ball hit at the right) which has flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 can enter (easy to enter). Is located in In other words, the ball which has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 is disposed at a position where it is impossible to enter the ball. Therefore, in order for the player to receive the payout of the winning balls during the jackpot (make a profit), the ball may be hit to the right.

  Inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which balls can pass are provided (see FIGS. 6A and 6B). The balls having flowed into the inside of the variable winning device 65 flow down any of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65 e 1 and special discharge flow path 65 e 2) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 to which a high probability state (probability state) of a special symbol is given after a big hit by passing a ball. The special discharge flow path 65e2 can be passed only in the first round of the jackpot. In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the ball can be easily entered into the specified winning opening 65a in the first round of the big hit (the open / close door 65f1 is opened for 30 seconds at maximum) (Big win A to D) and a big hit (big hit E, F) that makes it difficult to enter the ball into the specified winning hole 65a (the open / close door 65f1 is only opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds) .

  Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65 b disposed so as to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and a back side of the opening forming member 65 b to make the variable winning device 65 Base member 65c for screwing to game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting LEDs to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c There is an LED substrate 65d disposed, a back cover 65e for holding the LED substrate 65d with the base member 65c, and an open / close door 65f1 for opening / closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. An open / close unit 65f, a flow path cover 65g combined with the back side of the back cover 65e to form a flow path, the back cover 65e, and the flow path cover A switching member 65h for projecting into the flow passage formed of 5g to switch the flow passage of the gaming ball, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h, and a back surface disposed on the back side of the flow passage cover 65g It fixes to the back side of cover body 65j and its back cover body 65j, covers channel solenoid 65k which operates link member 65i from the back side, and fixes it to back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which game balls can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the gaming ball passing through the opening is guided in the left direction of FIG. 5B. The bottom is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 configured of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of the game ball is disposed. The gaming ball having passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the sorting flow path formed on the back side of the back cover 65e shown in FIG. 6 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state where the game ball can enter the ball by the open / close door 65f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can appear from the game board 13 side. It is changed to a possible (closed difficulty) closed state. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 65f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper part of the open / close door. Further, in the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  By configuring in this manner, in the open state of the open / close door 65f1, a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming balls flow down can be configured as the openings of the variable winning device 65, so more gaming balls can be efficiently specified winning openings You can win in 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5 (a) is a cross-sectional view of La-La shown in FIG. 5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined to the distribution flow path side of the back cover 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow channel of the back cover 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow channel 65e1 and a special discharge flow channel 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 6 (a) is a rear view of the back cover 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow passage 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the projection of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and a flow path cover 65g Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the passage cover body 65g is provided with an opening portion through which the induction piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated from the back side of the passage cover body 65g into the flow passage. It is possible to arrange as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the gaming ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the induction piece 65h2 disposed obliquely downward to the left and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. Ru. The game ball which has passed the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as a ball out. Exhausted.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the big hit game, so that the gaming state after the big hit game is the special variation It is set to the probability variation gaming state). That is, the probability changing switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability changing gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the gaming state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  As described above, since the gaming state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game . In addition, the operation of the switching member 65h is linked to the first round of the jackpot, and the switching member 65h is operated at a position where the special discharge flow path 65e2 is opened simultaneously with the start of the first round of the jackpot, Simultaneously with the end of the first round, the switching member 65h is actuated to a position where the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed. In addition, the time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the induction piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 0.2 seconds at the minimum. There is. As described above, in the jackpots E and F, since the open period of the open / close door 65f1 is 0.2 seconds at maximum, unless the open / close door 65f1 is opened, the ball can not enter the specified winning opening 65a at the same time The special discharge channel 65e2 is closed by the guide piece 65h2 before the ball flows into the special discharge channel 65e2. Therefore, when the jackpot E or F is reached, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 during the jackpot of one.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, the case where the gaming ball is guided to the normal discharge flow channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a view showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is not operating, and the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is blocked by the induction piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The gaming balls guided to the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 are guided to the upper surface of the induction piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and are guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, there is provided a ball discharge port switch 65e4 formed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of gaming balls. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls entered into the variable winning device 65 have been discharged, by the sum of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball jam occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be found early.

  As described above, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on that, the player receives a bonus ball (one ball winning in this embodiment 11). Individual prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, it is possible to execute lottery of whether or not to apply the probability variation gaming state by configuring whether or not to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 using the gaming ball after the detection is possible . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probability variation gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A substantially semicircular distributing member 660 is provided on the upper right side in a front view with respect to the variable winning device 65. The distributing members 660 are provided on the left and right with receiving portions capable of receiving the balls flowing down from above. The distributing member 660 has two arrangements, that is, the arrangement in which the receiving part on the right side comes immediately below the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 and the arrangement in which the receiving part on the left side comes just below the flow path It can be a street arrangement. FIG. 2 exemplifies the arrangement in which the right receiving part is directly below the flow path.

  When the ball flowing down the flow path is received by the right receiving portion in a state where the right receiving portion is located immediately below the flow path, the weight of the ball causes the distributing member 660 to be distributed. As a result of pivoting in the clockwise direction, the receiving part on the left side is disposed directly below the flow path. In addition, since the receiving part on the right side is inclined in the lower right direction in the front view by the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination, and flows downward in the lower right direction of the distributing member 660. The ball flowing down in the lower right direction of the distributing member 660 rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 along the flow path. For this reason, when the open / close door 65f1 is set to the open state, the ball enters the specified winning hole 65a.

  When the ball which has flowed down the flow path is received by the reception part on the left side in a state where the reception part on the left side is located directly below the flow path, the distributing member 660 is As a result of pivoting in the counterclockwise direction, the receiving part on the right side is disposed directly below the flow path. In addition, since the receiving part on the left side is inclined in the lower left direction in the front view by the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination and as a result, flows downward in the lower left direction of the distributing member 660. The ball that has flowed down toward the lower left of the distributing member 660 flows down to the second ball entrance 640 along the flow path, and about 80% of them enter the second ball entrance 640.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the ball (right-handed ball) punched into the channel provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is directed by the distributing member 660 to the direction of the variable winning device And the direction of the second ball entrance 640 alternately. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit), if you hit the right to win the ball to the specific winning opening 65a and obtain the winning ball, the ball to the second entry ball opening 640 during the big hit Enter a lot of balls. As a result, in most cases, at the end of the jackpot, the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol is accumulated up to the value (4).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type (big hit E, F) that the ball is hard to pass through the probability change switch 65e 3 has a high probability (95%) It is determined. Moreover, as for the big hit E and F, the open time of the specific winning a prize opening 65a in each round is extremely short (0.2 second), and it is difficult to enter a ball into the big hit. Therefore, if it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, with a high probability (95%), it is almost impossible to obtain a winning ball, and the gaming state after the big hit will be disadvantageous as well. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to execute only the lottery of the first special symbol as much as possible, since the lottery of the second special symbol is an undesirable lottery.

  However, as described above, if you hit the ball in the jackpot to the specific winning hole 65a and hit the right to obtain the winning ball, the ball will also enter the second entry ball opening 640, so at least the big hit After the end, the lottery of the second special symbol held in the jackpot is executed. Therefore, after the big hit, it is possible to realize the novel game characteristic of playing the game in hope that the big winning will not be made in the drawing of the special symbol until there is no holding ball corresponding to the drawing of the second special symbol. As expected of the player, if all the holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are out, it is possible to perform only the first special symbol lottery by performing a left strike, so the player The game can be continued without reducing the balls until the jackpot (jackpot A to C) of a relatively advantageous type for the player.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when one ball enters the second entrance 640, one winning ball is awarded. When right-handed, one ball is distributed to two balls in the direction of the second entrance 640 by the distributing member 660, so all the balls distributed in the direction of the second entrance 640 are second Even if the ball enters the ball entry port 640, only half of the ball hit by the right strike is paid out by the winning ball. Therefore, when the player strikes the right, the holding ball is likely to be reduced, so that it is possible to eliminate the merit for performing the strike. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed strike is performed at the normal time (a state other than a jackpot).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, if the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot is over, it becomes disadvantageous for the player, and all the holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are out. If it is, it will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game paying attention to a predetermined number of times (four times) of lottery results after the jackpot is finished, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. The ball which has not won any winning opening is guided to the ball discharging passage (not shown) through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, characteristic effects of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, which are performed in the main display area Dm, will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol by the time the big hit is finished by the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 when aiming at the specific winning hole 65a and making a right strike during the big hit The number of balls held is set to reach the upper limit number. Since a large jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous for the player, the player plays a game hoping that the lottery will be out while the lottery based on the second special symbol holding ball is being executed. In the first embodiment, whether or not the drawing result of becoming the jackpot of the second special symbol is included in the holding ball, until all the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is finished. It is configured to perform an effect that suggests that.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), the effects to be performed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 8A is a view showing an example of the display mode during the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 8A, during the jackpot, an effect that the adventurer 811 searches for a cave is displayed. In addition, on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, a display region HR1 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape is displayed. The current round number is displayed in the display area HR1. In the example of FIG. 8A, the characters "one round" are displayed to indicate that the present is the first round.

  On the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, a display region HR2 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape is displayed. In the display area HR2, the number of prize balls paid out based on entering the specified winning hole 65a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 8A, the characters "GET 0022" are displayed in the display area HR2, and 22 award balls are paid out (that is, two balls are identified after the jackpot is started). It shows that it entered the winning opening 65a).

  In addition, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, four display areas HR3a to HR3d are displayed. Although details will be described later, the four display areas HR3a to HR3d show the degree of expectation of the holding ball of the second special symbol increased by the ball entering the second entrance 640 during the big hit. The image is displayed. As described above, since it is more likely that the player who falls out in the second special symbol lottery is a more favorable result for the player than being a big win, the display areas HR3a to HR3d are for being out of alignment. An image showing the degree of expectation is displayed.

  In addition, FIG. 8A illustrates a state in which there is no holding ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, and each display area HR3a to HR3d is given a symbol of "?" The image is displayed.

  FIG. 8 (b) is a view showing an example of a display mode in the case of detecting an entering ball into the second entrance 640 during a big hit. As shown in FIG. 8 (b), when entering the second entrance ball hole 640 is detected in the jackpot, an effect that the adventurer 811 discovers the treasure box 812 is executed. This treasure box contains a key 813, and the aspect of the key 813 suggests an expectation that the lottery result of the second special symbol held based on the entering of the ball is out. The richer the aspect of the key 813, the higher the expectation of deviation, and the poor the aspect, the lower the expectation of deviation (higher risk of winning in the second special symbol lottery).

  FIG. 8B illustrates the case where the key 813 in the normal mode is displayed. When the adventurer 811 performs an effect of finding the key 813, the key having the same aspect as the found aspect is displayed above the display area in which "?" Is displayed among the display areas HR3a to HR3d. Displayed in order from the area. In the example of FIG. 8B, the case where the image of the key 813 is displayed in the display area HR3a in the display area in which the symbol "?" Is displayed is illustrated. In this manner, by displaying the mode of each key 813 found by the adventurer 811 in the display areas HR3a to HR3d, the variable display based on each holding ball executed after the end of the current jackpot The player can check the degree of expectation of at any time. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the main display area Dm is provided with the dedicated display areas HR3a to HR3d for displaying the degree of expectation of the holding ball of the second special symbol, but the dedicated display is not necessarily required. There is no need to provide an area. For example, the holding symbol of the second special symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds may be displayed in the form of a key discovered by the adventurer 811.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the ending effect after all the rounds of the jackpot are finished. In the first embodiment, from the ending period of the jackpot until the fluctuation time of all the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol elapses, the jackpot E of the second special symbol holding ball, E, An effect of notifying the player whether or not F is present is executed. That is, even after all the variation display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is finished, it indicates whether or not the gaming state remains the "special symbol oddity change state" and the "normal symbol short time state". The production for is performed. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the description, the "special symbol oddity change state" and the "normal symbol short time state", which are advantageous gaming conditions for the player, are referred to as "positive variation mode", which is disadvantageous for the player The "special symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol normal state", which are good gaming states, are referred to as "normal mode".

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot ending period is started, an adventurer 811 is directed to discover the door 814. Further, above the image of the door 814, a display area HR4 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape is formed. In this display area HR4, characters such as "Start door breakthrough mode !! Break through four doors !!" are displayed. It is advantageous for the player if it is possible to open the four doors using the four keys (displayed in the display areas HR3a to HR3d) collected in the jackpot by these display contents (second special symbol holding ball The player can easily understand that the probability change mode continues after digesting Further, in the display area HR1 on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, an image of a left-pointing arrow and a character of "left-handed" are displayed. With these displays, it is possible to cause the player to shoot the ball in the left direction (the ball is shot in the left channel of the variable display unit 80).

  In addition, it is set as the structure which alert | reports left hitting with the start of an ending period, in order to suppress that the lottery of a 2nd special symbol is performed after the end of a jackpot. That is, the ball hit by the player with a right strike during the ending period is fired after the end of the jackpot (and after the variation based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is started), the second ball entrance 640 Entering the ball, the number of lottery of the second special symbol after the big hit end will increase (preventing that the second special symbol lottery will be executed beyond the four held in the jackpot) This is to (suppress). As described above, even if the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot during the jackpot can hardly be achieved, and the gaming state after the jackpot becomes the normal mode disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, as the number of times of drawing of the second special symbol increases, it becomes more disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the game is started from the ending period in the first embodiment in order to prevent the player from continuing to hit the right after the big hit and to newly enter the ball into the second entrance 640. It is configured to inform the driver of the left strike. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed after the big hit can be limited to the one by the holding ball of the second special symbol put on hold in the big hit, resulting in an excessive disadvantage for the player. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  When the big hit (special game state) ends with the end of the ending period, as shown in FIG. 9B, an effect of breaking through the door 814 using the keys collected in the big hit is executed. FIG. 9B illustrates a case where the adventurer 811 uses the key displayed in the display area HR3a and succeeds in breaking through the door 814. When the breakthrough is successful, an image in which the door 814 is opened is displayed, and also, the text “Breakthrough !!” is displayed on the display region HR4. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that it is advantageous for the player (becoming a positive change mode) if the player passes the remaining three doors.

  The effect of breaking through the door 814 is basically performed in conjunction with the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol. That is, the effect that the adventurer 811 opens (breaks through) the first door using the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR3a) is based on the first holding ball of the second special symbol It is performed in a period from the start of the variable display to the start of the variable display based on the second holding ball. Similarly, the effect that the adventurer 811 uses the second key to open the second door is the third one after the variation display based on the second holding ball of the second special symbol is started. It is performed in the period until the variable display based on a holding ball is started. The effect that the adventurer 811 opens the third door using the third key is the fourth holding ball after the variation display based on the third holding ball of the second special symbol is started. It is performed in the period until the variable display based on is started. The effect of opening the fourth door using the fourth key is performed at the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display based on the fourth holding ball of the second special symbol. In addition, these are operations when it is a lottery result corresponding to the second special symbol holding ball falling off, and when it is a big hit in the second special symbol lottery, the door is broken during the period of the big hit The presentation is performed one or more times.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, it is difficult to detect whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol has become a big hit from the operation of the open / close door 65f1 in the variable winning device 65 As it becomes, in the case where the second special symbol is dislocated, it is configured such that the disengaging (so-called small hit) substantially accompanied by the opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 is determined. And the opening period (0.2 second) of the opening-closing door 65f1 in the case of becoming a small hit, and the opening period of the opening-closing door 65f1 in each round when becoming a big hit E, F in the lottery of the second special symbol I agree. Furthermore, when it becomes jackpot E, F, it is set as the structure which makes the interval period between rounds correspond to the fluctuation time (1 second) at the time of becoming out of the lottery of 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this way, even if the jackpot E or jackpot F during the execution of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol, the present is already jackpot from the opening period and opening interval of the opening and closing door 65f1 It can be difficult to determine whether it is or not. Thereby, the series of effects (door breakthrough mode effect) executed with the start of the ending period can be focused on to the end.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of failing to break through the fourth door in the door breakthrough mode effect. That is, it is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in case the big hit E and F are contained in the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol. As shown in FIG. 10 (a), when the adventurer 811 fails to break through the door, the display area HR4 displays the word "failure ..." and the adventurer 811 is possessed. An effect of breaking a key is executed. According to these display modes, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the probability change mode has ended (the jackpot has been won by either E or F).

  FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where it is succeeded to break through the fourth door in the door breakthrough mode effect. In this case, an image in which the fourth door is opened is displayed, and a character of “very successful !!” and a character of “probable change mode rush !!” are displayed in the display area HR4. According to these display modes, it can be easily understood that the player can play the game in the advantageous variation mode.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the door breakthrough described above is performed from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol increased in the jackpot. It is set as the structure which performs mode presentation. In this door breakthrough mode effect, all the variation display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol will be out, whether you can play the game in the probability change mode, the big hit E, F is included in the holding ball, in the probability change mode It can be suggested to the player whether or not the player falls into the normal mode without performing the drawing of the first special symbol. By performing a series of effects over the ending period and the plurality of variable displays after the jackpot, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the game after all the variation display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is ended depending on whether it is possible to break through the number of doors according to the number of holding balls of the second special symbol Although the configuration is configured to notify whether the state is the definite variation mode, the effect mode is not limited to this. For example, the adventurer 811 may be an enemy as long as it is an effect mode in which one of the two types of results (success, failure, victory, defeat, finalization, or deviation, etc.) is finally notified. The configuration may be such that the definite change mode is notified if the battle is won over the enemy.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the correspondence relationship between the temporal change of the effect mode during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and the temporal change of the state of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing status of the open / close door 65f1) will be described. FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship in the case where the probability variation mode is notified (that is, in the case of the lottery result in which all the holding balls of the second special symbol correspond to the disconnection). On the other hand, FIG. 11 (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence in the case where the normal mode is notified (that is, when any of the big hit E and F is included in the hold).

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when it is notified that the mode has shifted to the definite variation mode (when all the second special symbol lotterys are out), the start screen of the door breakthrough mode effect (with the start of the ending period) FIG. 9A is displayed. This start screen continues to be displayed during the ending period of one second, and the start screen ends when the ending period ends and the end timing of the jackpot is reached. When the jackpot ends, and the variable display based on the first holding ball (hold 1) of the second special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, an effect of breaking the first door (FIG. 9 (b (b ) Is started. This effect continues until the start timing of the change based on the second holding ball (pending 2). In addition, as above-mentioned, when it becomes remove | deviation by the lottery of a 2nd special symbol, it becomes a small hit substantially. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the variation display for 1 second based on the hold 1 is finished, the small hitting is started and the open / close door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. It is indicated that the door has been successfully broken in line with the opening period.

  Similarly, the variation display for one second and the opening and closing of the open / close door 65f1 for 0.2 seconds based on the small hit are repeated similarly. According to this, the effect of breaking through the second to fourth doors is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and it is informed (displayed) that the doors can be broken during each opening period of the open / close door 65f1 . In this manner, the result of whether or not the door can be broken is reported during the opening period of the small hitting after the fluctuation time has elapsed, so that the door is broken during the one second fluctuation period. Can further enhance their expectations for In addition, because it can be made to pay attention to the effect during the opening period of the small hit, it is difficult for the player to make it difficult to determine whether the opening pattern of the open / close door 65f1 has already been hit or not. it can.

  After the adventurer 811 breaks through the door 814 and is notified of the transition to the definite change mode (after the fourth small hit is finished), the dedicated display mode of the definite change mode is directed to break through the fourth door. (Not shown) is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the transition to the probability change mode has been made.

  FIG.11 (b) is the figure which showed the case where the 2nd retention ball of a 2nd special symbol is big hit F. FIG. In this case, an end period is also notified when transition to the normal mode is notified in the door breakthrough mode effect (when either of the big hit E or F is included in the holding ball of the second special symbol) With the start of the door breakthrough mode production is started. When the jackpot is over and the variation display of the special symbol based on the first holding ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, an effect to break through the first door is executed, and the opening period of the small hitting is performed The adventurer 811 breaks through the first door according to.

  When the variation display of the special symbol based on the second holding ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, an effect to break through the second door is executed. At this time, the variable display of 1 second is executed based on the second holding ball, and the jackpot F is started after 1 second. When the jackpot becomes F and the first round is started, the open / close door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In accordance with the opening period, it is informed that the adventurer 811 has succeeded in breaking through the door. And with the start of the interval period after the end of the first round, an effect to break through the third door is executed, and the opening period of the second round after the interval period of one second has elapsed (0.2 During the second), it is informed that the third door has been successfully breached.

  Also, when the interval period after the end of the second round is started, an effect to break through the fourth door is executed, and the opening period of the third round after the interval period of one second has elapsed (0. During 2 seconds, it is informed that the fourth door can not be broken (see FIG. 10A).

  After being notified that the door has failed to break through, a result display (not shown) indicating the total number of prize balls paid out in the current probability change mode is executed until the end of the jackpot. When the jackpot is over, it is set to the dedicated display mode of the normal mode.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the variable display is sequentially performed based on the holding ball of the second special symbol after the big hit, the time elapsed in the state of the open / close door 65f1 in the case where the variable display and the small hit are repeated. The change (see FIG. 11 (a)) and the change with time of the state of the open / close door 65f1 (see FIG. 11 (b)) when the big hit E or F is included in the holding ball of the second special symbol (see FIG. 11 (b)) It is configured to match up until the end of the door breakthrough mode effect. That is, the open period of the open / close door 65f1 in each round of the big hit E, F is configured to be 0.2 seconds which is the same period as the open period of the small hit. Moreover, it comprised so that the length of the interval period after the 1st-4th round of big hit E and F was 1 second which is a period same as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this way, even if any of the first to fourth reserved balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the big hit E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode effect is finished The operation of the door 65f1 can be made the same as in the case where the probability change mode is notified (see FIG. 11A). Therefore, it can be difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot E or F has been reached from the operation of the open / close door 65f1, so that the door breakthrough mode effect can be focused on to the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, in FIG.11 (b), even when it becomes big hit F in the 2nd holding ball (it falls to a normal mode), the mode which breaks through to the 3rd door and fails in the 4th door is illustrated. However, it may be configured to execute an effect that fails to break through the door when a change in either of the jackpots E and F is performed while simply digesting the second special symbol holding ball.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 17) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 17, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery, the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81, the lottery of the display result of the 2nd symbol display 83, etc. Used in

  For the setting of the display of the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery, and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the big hit symbol , A variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 36) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is a first entry. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball port 64, respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (the first to fourth holding areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored according to the timing of entering the second entrance 640, respectively. Furthermore, the RAM 203 is provided with an ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is common in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number to be the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the first random number counter When the value of C1 coincides with the value of the jackpot random number set by the first random number table, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first per random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol and high probability when special symbol is more likely to be a big hit than low probability (special symbol special It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently (see FIG. 13B). Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value thereof Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a big hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number which becomes the slippage of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the slippage of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are four random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number "0 to 3" is the first random number for low probability. It is stored in the table (see FIG. 13 (b)). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 4, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/100". In addition, as shown in FIG.13 (b), the random number value (counter value) used as a big hit is common in the lottery of a 1st special symbol, and the lottery of a 2nd special symbol. On the other hand, random number values other than the above-mentioned jackpot random number values correspond to deviation. As described above, the off of the special symbol includes a small hit. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), when the special symbol has a low probability, the random number value falling off in the first special symbol lottery is 396 of "4 to 399". On the other hand, the random number value which falls out in the lottery of the second special symbol is 37 of “3 to 40”, and the random value which becomes the small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol is “41 to 399” It is 359 pieces.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 40 random number values that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 39” are stored in the first random number table for high probability ((0 to 39) See FIG. 13 (a)). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 40, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/10". In addition, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, the random number value which is removed in the drawing of the first special symbol is 360 of “40 to 399”. On the other hand, only "40" is specified as the random number value which is out in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number value which becomes the small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol is 359 of "41-399" Each is specified.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And as shown in Drawing 14 (a), it becomes a big hit by lottery of the 1st special symbol, and the big hit type in case the value of the 1st hitting type counter C2 is "0-9" is "big hit A" ( 16 rounds) The jackpot type when the value is "10 to 89" is "jackpot B" (five round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "90 to 99" is "jackpot C" (2 round probability variation jackpot).

  On the other hand, the jackpot type when the second special symbol lottery is a big hit and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4” is “big hit D” (16 round probability variation big hit). The jackpot type when the value is "5-49" is "jackpot E" (7 rounds usually jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "50-99" is "jackpot F" (6 rounds usually a big hit).

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that six types of jackpot types (big hit A to F) are determined by the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit class counter C2. It is done. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability changing state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. In other words, even if the jackpot type is decided, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the definite change state. The above-mentioned “probable jackpot” means a jackpot of a type in which the ball easily passes through the probability switch 65e3 in the jackpot, and the “normal jackpot” is a jackpot of the type in which the ball is unlikely to pass the jackpot in the jackpot Means.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value thereof is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “back and forth reach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 15A) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  Here, the variation pattern table 202 d will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the drawing of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 15 (a), and the table 202d1 per special drawing 1 (see FIG. 15 (b)). A table 202d2 for off-special-figure 1 (normal) (see FIG. 15 (c)) and a table 202d3 for off-special-figure 1 (probable variation) (see FIG. 15 (d)) are at least defined. In addition, as a table for selecting the variation pattern based on the lottery of the second special symbol, the table 202d4 per special figure 2 (4 variations or less) (see FIG. 16 (a)) and the special figure 2 per (5 variations or more Table 202d5 (see FIG. 16 (b)), table 202d6 for off special figure 2 (less than 4 changes) (see FIG. 16 (c)), and table 202d7 for off special figure 2 (5 or more changes) (figure 16 (d)) are at least defined.

  First, the special drawing-per-table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 15 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special drawing-per-table 202d1. The special drawing 1 table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the special drawing 1 table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 50” as the judgment value of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and various types of super reach are included in the range of “51 to 179”. A variation pattern of (60 seconds) is associated, and variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “180 to 198”. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, the variation pattern corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the variation pattern It is selected from the special drawing 1 table 202d1.

  FIG. 15C is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the (normal) deviation pattern table 202d2 for disconnection. The (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 for out of alignment is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. . When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non reach) or out of reach (common in reach) from the stop type selection table not shown is a stop type It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99" (Set the front and back out of reach, non back and forth out of reach).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is completely out of the range, either a short variation (7 seconds) in which the variation time is relatively short or a long variation (10 seconds) in which the variation time is relatively long is set. “0 to 98” is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for out-of-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of reach in the range of “0 to 149” with the judgment value of fluctuation type counter CS1 and various kinds of out-over super reach in the range of “150 to 197” There are various special reach types (90 seconds) set for “60 seconds” and “198”.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 determines the type of stop, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for removal Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the out-of-order (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 15D is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery of the special symbol is out in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In the deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the value of the set fluctuation type counter CS1 is different from the above-described deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete removal is determined If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the outreach (reach in front and back, reach other than back and forth) is determined.

  As described above, when the game is in the probability variation gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation at the time of the definite change becomes long and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, the game is postponed during the probability change gaming state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player feels bored.

  FIG. 16A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the table 202 d 4 for the special figure 2 (four or less variation or less). The table 202d4 for this special figure 2 (4 variations or less) is selected when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 4 or less and the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery after the jackpot is over It is a data table in which the type of fluctuation pattern (variation time) is defined. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 4 or less after the big hit, the variation time as the variation pattern is short circuit variation for 1 second regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is selected.

  FIG. 16B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the table 202d5 for each special figure 2 (five or more variations). The table 202d5 for this special figure 2 (five or more variations) is selected when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is five or more after the big hit is finished, and when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery It is a data table in which the type of fluctuation pattern (variation time) is defined. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 5 times or more after the big hit, the variation time as the variation pattern is long for 300 seconds, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is selected.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the table 202d6 for the special figure 2 off (4 variations or less). The table 202d6 for this special figure 2 off (4 changes or less) is a case where the number of times of change of the special symbol is 4 times or less after the big hit is over, and it falls out in the second special symbol lottery (including small hit) It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected in the case of becoming is defined. As shown in FIG. 16 (c), if the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 4 times or less after the big hit, the variation pattern is out of 1 second and the variation is short as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is selected.

  FIG. 16D is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the table 202d7 for the special figure 2 deviation (five or more variations). The table 202d7 for this special figure 2 (five or more variations) is out of the special symbol lottery (including small hits) when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is five or more after the big hit is over It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected in the case is defined. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 5 or more after the big hit, the variation pattern has a variation time of 300 seconds as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is selected.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the number of times of execution of the variation display of the special symbol is four or less after the big hit, the lottery result is out (small hit (small hit) Whether it is included or jackpot, 1 second is always set as the fluctuation time. Thereby, it can be made difficult to judge whether it became either of big hit E, F from the change time, during execution of the change display based on the holding ball of the 2nd special symbol after a big hit. That is, it can be made difficult to determine from the fluctuation time whether or not the gaming state after all the fluctuation display based on the holding balls of the second special symbol is finished is the probability change mode. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether or not to be in the definite change mode can pay attention to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect to perform the game, so that the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the number of times of execution of the variation display of the special symbol is five or more after the big hit, regardless of the lottery result, as the variation time The configuration is such that 300 seconds is always set. As a result, if the player performs right hitting in a state other than during a jackpot, a lottery of a special symbol can be executed only once in a minimum of 300 seconds (five minutes) (very low gaming efficiency). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from performing a right-handed strike in a state other than during a jackpot. Temporarily, if you hit the right in a state other than the jackpot, especially in the probability variation mode, only the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed, either of the jackpot E, F which is disadvantageous for the player in the case of a jackpot Very likely to be. In other words, it is highly unlikely to win a prize ball and is likely to become a big hit that falls into the normal mode after a big hit. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player may be dissatisfied with the game by becoming an adverse normal mode without sufficiently enjoying the game in the advantageous probability change mode.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, since the gaming efficiency in the case of performing the right hitting in a state other than the big hit is deteriorated, it is possible to suppress the player from performing the right hitting in the state other than the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to further enjoy the game in the definite change mode.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, periodically, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, and the normal symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the ball storage area 203c.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 14 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. If it matches the value of the second random number set by the second random number table, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for high probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit with normal symbol from low probability (general symbol The number of jackpot random numbers that are divided into two types for the time-shortening period) is set to be different (see FIG. 14B). Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (b), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random values that are the symbols of the normal symbol, and the value is “5 to 28”. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240 while the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the ball passes through the ordinary ball entry port (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 The symbol change display is usually performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed) The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as the symbol), and the motorized accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the motorized role 64a is opened only once for 0.2 seconds, but it is open. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 The variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second collision random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the symbol is hit normally. In this case, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol), and the electric part 64a is opened "one second x 3 times" Be done. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the normal symbol's low probability, and furthermore, the open period of the motorized symbol 64a is Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the electric role member 64a is opened for "one second x 3 times" when the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time or The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Referring back to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 36), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 35) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 stores at least a first random number table 202a, a first collision type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above. ing.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of the judgment value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in Fig. 13 (b)), and the first special symbol is judged to be out of position “4 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be calculated (see 202 a 2 in FIG. 13 (b)). In addition, “3 to 40” is defined as the range of the judgment value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 13 (b)), and the judgment value of the second special symbol determined to be a small hit “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 13B). Also, in the high probability state (probability state) of the special symbol, “0 to 39” is defined as the range of the judgment value determined to be a big hit (see 202 a 4 in FIG. 13 (b)). “40 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be determined (see 202 a 5 in FIG. 13B). In addition, “40” is defined as the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a5 in FIG. 13 (b)), and “41 to 399” is determined as the small hit in the second special symbol. “(See 202 a 6 in FIG. 13 (b)). When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning combination matches any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpots specified in the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 13 (b)) , It is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14 (a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the first hit type counter C2 is determined A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per unit is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), for the first special symbol, "big hit A" is defined in association with the range of "0 to 9" in the first hit category counter C2 value. (See 202b1 in FIG. 14A). This "big hit A" is a big hit of 16 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit A" is 10, so "big hit A" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 10% (10/100). This "big hit A" is opened in each round of the big hit until the open / close door 65f1 passes 30 seconds or seven balls are won. Therefore, it is possible to cause the upper limit number (seven) of balls to be won to the specific winning opening 65a almost certainly before 30 seconds have elapsed, only by the player continuing to hit the right in each round. When it comes to jackpot A, a large number of balls can be won. In addition, in one round where the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) can pass, if the player continues to strike the right, the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 almost certainly. Therefore, after the end of "big hit A", it becomes a definite change mode almost certainly. As described above, the "big hit A" is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probability change mode.

  With respect to the first special symbol, the "big hit B" is defined in association with the range of "10 to 89" in the value of the first hit type counter C2 (see 202b2 of FIG. 14A). . This "big hit B" is a big hit of 5 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit B" is 80, so "big hit B" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 80% (80/100). The "big hit B" is, similarly to the "big hit A", in each round of the big hit, the open / close door 65f1 is opened until 30 seconds have elapsed or seven balls are won. Therefore, as with the jackpot A, a large number of balls can be paid out. Further, in the first round of the jackpot, the ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3 almost certainly, so that after the end of the "big hit B", it is almost certainly turned into the probability changing mode. In this way, since "big hit B" has fewer rounds than "big hit A" (and "big hit D" described later), the number of prize balls that can be obtained will be less than "big hit A" (and "big hit D") However, many prize balls can be paid out. In addition, since the game state after the big hit becomes the definite change mode, the game state shifts to the advantageous game state for the player after the big hit, similarly to "big hit A".

  For the first special symbol, "big hit C" is defined in association with the range of "90 to 99" in the value of the first hit type counter C2 (refer to 202b3 in FIG. 14A). . This "big hit C" is a big hit of 2 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value which is the "big hit C" is 10, so the "big hit C" is determined when it becomes the big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 10% (10/100). This "big hit C", like "big hit A" and "big hit B", in each round of the big hit, the open / close door 65f1 is opened until 30 seconds have elapsed or seven balls are won. Accordingly, as in the "big hit A" and the "big hit B", it is possible to receive a large amount of prize balls. Further, in the first round of the jackpot, the ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3 almost certainly, so after the end of the "big hit C", it is almost certainly turned into the probability changing mode. As described above, since "the jackpot C" has the smallest number of rounds, although the number of prize balls that can be acquired is small, it is possible to pay out the prize balls, so it is possible to increase the player's ball. In addition, since the game state after the big hit becomes the definite change mode, the game state is shifted to the player's advantageous state after the big hit, similarly to "big hit A" and "big hit B".

  In this way, if it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, in addition to being able to receive the payout of the award ball for 2 rounds to 16 rounds, since the gaming state after the big hit is almost certainly a definite change mode, It is advantageous for the player regardless of which jackpot type.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), for the second special symbol, “big hit D” is defined in association with the range of “0 to 4” in the first hit category counter C2 value. (See 202 b 4 in FIG. 14A). The "big hit D" is a big hit of 16 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit D" is 5, so "big hit D" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery Rate is 5% (5/100). Since the "big hit D" is the same operation as the "big hit A", it is the same as the "big hit A" and is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

  With respect to the second special symbol, the "big hit E" is defined in association with the range of the first hit type counter C2 having a value of "5-49" (see 202b5 in FIG. 14A). . This "big hit E" is a big hit of 7 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit E" is 45, so "big hit E" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 45% (45/100). The "big hit E" is opened in each round of the big hit until the open / close door 65f1 passes 0.2 seconds or seven balls are won. Therefore, it is difficult to even cause one ball to enter the specified winning combination opening 65a in each round, so it is almost impossible to obtain a winning ball. In addition, since it becomes difficult to cause the ball to enter the specified winning combination opening 65a in the first round, there is almost no possibility that the ball will pass through the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow path 65e2 in the first round. Therefore, the gaming state after the "big hit E" ends becomes the "normal mode" which is substantially disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, since "big hit E" can hardly obtain a winning ball and it is extremely likely to shift to a disadvantageous "normal mode" after a big hit, it becomes a disadvantageous hit type for the player.

  With respect to the second special symbol, the "big hit F" is defined in association with the range of "50 to 99" in the value of the first hit type counter C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 14A). . This "big hit F" is a big hit of six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit F" is 50, so "big hit F" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 50% (50/100). This "big hit F" is, similarly to "big hit E", in each round of the big hit, the open / close door 65f1 is opened until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or seven balls are won. Therefore, as with "big hit E", it is hardly possible to obtain a winning ball and it is extremely likely to shift to a disadvantageous "normal mode" after a big hit, which is a disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

  As described above, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is achieved, the jackpot can hardly be obtained with a high probability (ratio of 95%), and the gaming state after the jackpot is almost certainly the normal mode and the jackpot E , Or F, which is likely to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it can be expected that the player can expect that all the holding balls of the second special symbol, which are increased by the balls entering the second entrance 640 during the big hit, will be dislocated, It is possible to provide novel gameplay.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14 (b)) is a data table in which a hit determination value of an ordinary symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for the hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 14 (b)). Moreover, in the high probability state of a normal symbol, "5-204" is prescribed | regulated as a determination value used as a hit of a normal symbol (refer 202 c3 of FIG.14 (b)). The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment refers to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 and the second random number table 202c. , It is determined whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display pattern. The details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, a second Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, remaining ball timer flag 203k, remaining ball timer 203m, probability variation effective flag 203n A probability variation effective timer 203o, an ejection number counter 203p, a fluctuation time counter 203q, a large hitting middle flag 203r, a small hitting middle flag 203s, a round end flag 203t, and other memory areas 203z are provided.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type The respective values of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are the execution areas ( 17) is shifted (moved), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area thereof, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. About the storing method etc. of a counter value, since it is the same as that of the 1st special symbol holding ball storing area 203a, it omits about the detailed explanation.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding first Among the vacant areas of area 4), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first area for holding to the execution area, the first area for holding becomes empty, so it is the same as the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. In addition, shift processing is performed to pack winning data stored in another reserve area into a reserve area with a smaller area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and a maximum value of 4 each time the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Up to one is added (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 28).

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S211 in FIG. 28, S30 in FIG. See S405). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110, the variable display being held by the main control unit 110 It is possible to obtain the value of the holding ball number itself. Thereby, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is the holding of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the command for holding ball number received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of the second entry ball entry 640 (start winning combination). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the maximum value of 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Up to one is added (see S410 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 28). Similarly to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (number of waits) of the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. See S704 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 32).

  When the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 33: No) ).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state (probability change mode) of the special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203g is on, the probability change state (probability change mode) If the probability change flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (normal mode) of the special symbol. In addition, as described above, in the definite variation mode, the symbol is in the short time state. Therefore, if the probability change flag 203g is on, it indicates that the symbol is a probability change state of the special symbol, and it is also a time saving state of the normal symbol.

  The probability change flag 203g has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON at the end of the jackpot (see S1302 in FIG. 39) when the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Further, the probability change flag 203g is reset to OFF when the jackpot game is started (see S219 in FIG. 28).

  The probability change flag 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 29). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S213) is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S213), the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if it is on, the lottery of the special symbol is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability time, If the flag 203g is off, a drawing of a special symbol is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  Further, the probability change flag 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is short in the normal symbol change processing (S608, S614, and S620 in FIG. 32). Specifically, if the probability change flag 203g is referred to in the normal symbol variation processing, and the probability change flag 203g is on, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the second random number table 202c for high probability time On the other hand (see S609 in FIG. 32), if the probability change flag 203g is off, a lottery of a normal symbol is performed based on the second random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 32). Further, in the normal symbol variation process, the probability change flag 203g is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol or the opening time of the motorized accessory 64a when the normal symbol is hit (S614 in FIG. 32, See S620).

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability change state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the definite changing state is determined depending on whether or not the ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the big hit game. Here, when the sphere passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1416 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, this probability change setting flag 203h is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S1304 in FIG. 39). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up at the time of power-off, and is set to a state immediately before power-off at the time of recovery (at power-on). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that it has passed, the probability change setting flag It may be configured to formally turn on 203h and return. In this case, it can be determined whether the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0 or not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side by determining the injustice where only the probability change setting flag 203h is rewritten to ON and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation pass counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round (one round of the jackpot in the present embodiment) in the jackpot game. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203p described later. When passing through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated (S1415 in FIG. 40). Further, after the process of determining whether the number of gaming balls that have won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls is executed, the value is reset to “0” which is an initial value (S1511 in FIG. 41). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203 j is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65 a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, one is added and updated one by one based on detection that the ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65 (S1403 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when one round is over, the number of winnings on the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharging (total value of the discharged number counter 203p and the probability variation passing counter 203i) is one. After it is determined whether or not it has been accepted, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 41). The value of the winning number counter 203 j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball swelling period after one round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed. If the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, it means that the ball is being thrown. While the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203m described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 41). The remaining ball timer 203m is a counter for determining the time after the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time required for the balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203m is a time required for the game balls to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the preset one round is finished and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game balls ejected in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is the remaining ball timer in advance. It is set as the upper limit of 203 m. Based on the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203m, it is determined whether the number of winning to the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharging thereof match. (S1507 in FIG. 41). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that effect. Therefore, it can be early notified that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65. In addition, it is possible to suppress the injustice in which the ball is allowed to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 by leaving the ball illegally remaining in the variable winning device 65 and seeing the timing of the first round of the big hit E or the big hit F.

  It should be noted that if the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that a positive change state is incorrectly given.

  The probability variation effective flag 203 n is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is validated when the ball passes to the probability variation switch 65 e 3 after the flow path solenoid 65 k is set to off. When the probability variation effective flag 203n is set to ON, the gaming ball having flowed into the special discharge flow channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is a probability variation switch based on the fact that the flow channel solenoid 65k is on. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it indicates that passage of the ball through the probability variation switch 65e3 is a normal period.

  The probability variation effective timer 203o is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation effective flag 203n described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this probability variation effective timer 203o, it is possible to determine a period necessary to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 normally. In this embodiment, the time required for the gaming ball having entered the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability variation effective timer 203o is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and thereafter, even if passing the probability variation switch 65e3, it is determined to be incorrect and the passage is not determined.

  Thereby, after the switching member 65h closes the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and the gaming ball is passed through the probability changing switch 65e3, or the piano from below the probability changing switch 65e3 It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraudulent acts such as pushing up and passing a game ball with a line or the like, or erroneously detecting passage of a magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.

  The number-of-discharges counter 203 p is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed through the ball discharge port switch 65 e 4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203p is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of balls having won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls (S1511 in FIG. 41).

  The fluctuation time counter 203 q is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. In the fluctuation time counter 203 q, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202 d is set (see S 311 in FIG. 29). In addition, this fluctuation time counter 203 q is decremented by 1 in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 28) (see S 214 in FIG. 28), and it is determined whether the fluctuation time has elapsed based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 203 q It is determined.

  The jackpot flag 203r is a flag indicating whether a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If this big hit medium flag 203r is on, it means that it is big hit, and if it is off, it means that it is not big hit. The jackpot flag 203r is a jackpot by a special symbol lottery, and is set to ON after the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1103 in FIG. 37). Also, it is set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 39). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the jackpot middle flag 203r is referred to, and it is determined whether or not a jackpot is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 28).

  The small hit middle flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit middle flag 203s is on, it means that the small hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the small hit is not in progress. The small hit middle flag 203r is a small hit in the special symbol lottery, and the small hit starts and is set on (see S1603 in FIG. 42). Also, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S1610 in FIG. 42). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the small hitting middle flag 203s is referred to, and it is judged whether or not the small hitting is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 28).

  The round end flag 203t is a flag indicating whether or not it is a pitching period after the end of the jackpot round. If the round end flag 203t is on, it indicates that the ball swelling period after the round is over, and if it is off, it indicates that the ball swelling period is over.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags. By performing control with reference to these flags and counters, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics of playing a game in hopes of being removed by the holding balls of the second special symbol described above.

  Next, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is roughly classified into three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, the door breakthrough mode shown in the middle of FIG. 19, and the positive variation mode shown in the lower part of FIG. 19 are provided.

  The normal mode, as described above, indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of becoming a big hit is low, and it is difficult for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. It is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, as described above, the definite variation mode indicates the definite variation state of the special symbol and the short symbol condition of the ordinary symbol, and the jackpot probability is high and the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64. It is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

  In addition, the door breakthrough mode indicates a state in which there is a holding ball of the second special symbol acquired during execution of the probability variation big hit (big hit A to D), all lottery based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is out If it becomes, it is a state which shows that it can play a game in advantageous positive variation mode. This door breakthrough mode is in the same state as the positive variation mode except that the second special symbol holding ball is present. That is, the probability of becoming a big hit in the drawing of the special symbol is high (1/10), and the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. The percentage of the door breakthrough mode is 65.6% because the percentage of all the holding balls of the 4 second special symbols stored in the jackpot is about 65.6% (9/10 to the 4th power) It can also be said that a definite change mode can be expected.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, there is a possibility that transition from the normal mode to another mode is made only in the case of a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the first special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to C), and if the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round, it shifts to the door breakthrough mode after the big hit. . As described above, in the jackpots A to C, the ball passes through the approximately positive change switch 65e3 simply by performing a right strike in one round. If the ball did not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the player did not win a V) because the player did not hit the ball, the gaming state after the big hit ends up being set to the normal mode again. Be done.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, the door breakthrough mode is switched to another mode, as well as when the jackpot is reached, and also when all the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is finished. That is, as shown in FIG. 19, when the variation display based on the holding balls of all the second special symbols is finished in the door breakthrough mode, the mode is shifted to the definite variation mode.

  In addition, when it becomes the big hit D which is decided with the ratio of 5% when it becomes the big hit with the drawing of the 2nd special symbol, the ball almost passes the probability change switch 65e3, so after the big hit again, the door breakthrough mode Migrate to If the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the player does not win a V) because the player does not hit the ball, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the normal mode. . On the other hand, when it becomes either of jackpot E or jackpot F determined by the ratio of 95% when it became a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball to the specified winning opening 65a in the first round Since it is difficult to enter the ball, almost no ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19, after the end of the jackpots E and F, the mode shifts to the normal mode.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 19, transition from the positive variation mode to another mode is made only when the jackpot is achieved. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the first special symbol drawing is a big hit (big hit A to C), and if the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round, the door breakthrough mode after the big hit ends Transition. Since the jackpots A to C are all jackpot types that allow the ball to easily pass to the probability change switch 65e3, after the jackpot is finished, the mode is almost shifted to the door breakthrough mode. If the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the player does not win a V) because the player does not hit the ball, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the normal mode. .

  As described above, in the first embodiment, by going back and forth between the three types of modes, the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the holding ball of the second special symbol after the big hit ends is all out It is possible to realize the distinctive game characteristic that it is possible to play the game in the advantageous probability change mode. In a general pachinko machine, it is a preferable event for the player to become a big hit again in the hold after the big hit (so-called, hold in a row), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the hold is in the hold It is possible to give the player an advantage in the expectation that the continuous movement will not occur. As a result, since it is possible to provide novel game characteristics different from those of general pachinko machines, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the opening / closing door 65f1 for closing or opening the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 comprising a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving a motorized product is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Various processing is executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34), Setting control of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 roughly indicates the contents of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, out of range, etc.) ) Is used to determine the detailed contents of the change. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a subsidiary fluctuation time counter At least 223 f, a breakthrough effect counter 223 g, a game state storage area 223 h, and other memory areas 223 z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area consisting of one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. There is. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a counter for counting the number of holding balls (waiting number) corresponding to the drawing of the first special symbol held in the main control unit 110 up to four times, the second special The symbol holding ball number counter 223 c is a counter that counts the number of holding balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and the second special symbol holding ball number The value of the counter 203e can not be acquired. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter At 223c, the number of holding balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls in the variable display is added by entering balls into first entrance 64 and second entrance 640, or when the main controller 110 selects a special symbol Is displayed when the variable display in is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d after addition or after subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e The ball number command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, or the second special symbol, from the holding ball number command The value of the holding ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see S4208 in FIG. 46). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 Therefore, it is possible to update the value while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command. And to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c after storage, the display holding ball number command for the display control device 114 Send to.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the second special The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the number-of-holding-balls pattern corresponding to the value of the number-of-pattern-holding ball counter 223c in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, and the second special symbol holding ball number counter The value is changed while synchronizing with 203e. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e Can be changed while synchronized to Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 46), and turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S4802 in FIG. 52). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 46) and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S4807 in FIG. 52). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The sub fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. When the fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in sub fluctuation time counter 223f.

  The breakthrough effect counter 223g is a counter indicating the number of the remaining doors to be breached before transition to the probability change mode in the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Based on the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is finished.

  The gaming state storage area 223 h is a storage area for storing data according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The gaming state storage area 223h is updated each time the main control device 110 receives a state command that is output each time a change in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 occurs (see S4210 in FIG. 46). The gaming state storage area 223h is configured of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the gaming state by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is in effect, and the bit of the lower second bit indicates whether or not it is a definite variation state of special symbol. Therefore, in the “normal mode”, the lower 2 bits are “00 B”, while in the “door breakthrough mode” and the “probability change mode”, the lower 2 bits are “11 B”. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223 h.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and an elapsed time timer for counting the rendering time. doing. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that constitutes the control program In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 53) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 26) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance is started. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by the fluctuation effect when entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 53).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of the power on, as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is a command to start variation, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 22 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on as shown in Fig. 22 (c), The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect when “big hit of special symbol”, and when “out of special symbol” is shown in FIG. 22 (c) The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  Also, while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player starts the game, and the ball is detected at the first ball inlet 64 or the second ball inlet 640 In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display 81, the corresponding fluctuation effect is displayed as the third symbol It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the range of the back surface image and the back surface image stored in the back surface image area 235c in the back surface image will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory view for explaining the ranges of four types of back images and the back images stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. FIG. 23 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” while the back surface A corresponds to the “sand beach stage”.

  As the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, as shown in FIG. 23, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  In each of the images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “image for scrolling”), the images are configured such that the back surface image is continuous at the position a and the position c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the change of the back surface type is determined, and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the position between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the "sand beach stage" which is the initial stage, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sand beach stage" By making all the data resident in the rear image area 235 c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", as shown in FIG. It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but if doing so, the resident video RAM 235 As a very large amount of RAM must be used, this may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range of FIG. 23 (a) to (b) Image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIG. 23 (a) and (b)) including its initial position, and the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the change of the stage is determined by the lottery at the start of the change. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, as for the back surface B, only the image data corresponding to the partial image range is stored, so that the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236 a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 7) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbol are resident. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 occurs, in the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the change effect is not immediately started at 81.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters including "adventurer" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, thereby displaying When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235 The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out the image data resident in advance. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect is now It is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one fluctuation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates either of the back surfaces A, B corresponding to the stage (either “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”) selected by the player, or a back surface different from the back surfaces A, B Information specifying whether to display an image is described. Further, in the case of specifying to display a rear surface image different from the rear surfaces A and B, the rear surface type also describes information specifying which rear surface image to display.

  When it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A and B as the drawing target In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 24). "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 25 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 25).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25) In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIGS. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 53). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 64 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 55 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (FIG. 55B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 55 (b) (see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 64A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 26) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 26) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d according to the command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command etc. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later (see FIG. 26) in which the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 55 (b In S6303), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 61) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 26), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 26, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V-interruption process (FIG. 55 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 61). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 65). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 65). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 66).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 55B) of the process is performed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When reaching 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, each clears to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S104), and then, A start winning process is executed in association with a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed To do (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the present or present is a jackpot or small hit of a special symbol (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the jackpot middle flag 203r and the small hit middle flag 203s is on. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is neither large hit nor small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding times N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value the second special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223c.

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the pending first area to the pending fourth area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to the process of S213.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the first special symbol The number of times of suspension N1 of the variable display based on the lottery is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209).

  When it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210), and a holding ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value as the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223b.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S209), and the process proceeds to S213 Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and the present process is ended. In addition, the details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q is updated by subtracting 1 (S214), and the fluctuation time counter after updating Based on the value of 203 q, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 203 q updated in the process of S 214 has become 0. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 One of jackpots A to F is determined.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and in the case of a big hit B, a red LED is turned on. , Turn on the green LED, and turn on the blue LED and the green LED when the jackpot D is reached. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (this lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S218). If the lottery result this time is the big hit of the special symbol (S218: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set off (S219), the start of the big hit of the special symbol is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. Do. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the processing of S219, when the jackpot control processing (S1004) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) is executed, the processing branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S218, if the current lottery result is the omission of the special symbol (S218: No), the process of S219 and S220 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S221.

  The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 36) to be described later executed by the MPU 201 It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the gaming state included in the state command. Thereby, the state which the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 grasps | ascertain can be made to correspond with the state of the actual pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the lottery of "big hit of the special symbol" or "out of the special symbol" will be performed (judgment determination) and the first symbol It is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b And each value of stop classification selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, the probability change flag 203g is read out and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, if the probability change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability change state, and if the probability change flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not positive change). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13B). As described above, 40 random numbers from "0 to 39" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not a definite pattern of special symbols (is a low probability of special symbols) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301. On the basis of the value of and the first random number table for low probability (refer to FIG. 13B), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is the jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number to be hit (that is, "0 to 39"), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first collision type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14A) to determine what the jackpot type is. Do. As described above, when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is a big hit A (16 round probability variation big hit) If it is in the range of "10 to 89", it is determined that the jackpot B (five round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", it is the jackpot C (two round probability variation jackpot) It judges (refer to Drawing 14 (a)). On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined as a big hit D (16 round probability variation big hit), If it is in the range of "5-49", it is determined that it is jackpot E (7 rounds usually jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50-99", it is judged that it is jackpot F (6 rounds normally jackpot) ( 14 (a)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (big hit A to F). Further, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type, the big hit type (big hit A to F) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Determine the fluctuation time).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is dislocated (including small hitting) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of disengaging is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the third symbol display device is based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As a stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is a reach before or after, a reach other than before or after, or a complete miss.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (variation corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Determine the time).

  When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern this time is set in the fluctuation time counter 203 q (S 311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S312). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 36). When the process of S312 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and determines whether there is a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. This process is for executing a process of holding values indicated by various counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained ( S402). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether the ball has not won the first ball entry 64 (S401: No) or the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d even if the ball has won the first ball entry 64 If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). And the ball holding ball number command which shows the value of the 1st special symbol holding ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value as the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223b.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether the ball has won the second entrance 640 (start winning) (S407). Also in the present process, as in the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained ( S408) It is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S409).

  Then, whether there is no winning on the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning on the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (ie, it is 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special One is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S410). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the 2nd special symbol holding ball number counter 203e changed by operation is set (S411).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value the second special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223c.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S411, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above, It stores in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (pending first area to pending fourth area) of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and proceeds to the processing of S413. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S413, a prefetch process for prefetching the success or failure from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S413), and this process is ended. The details of this pre-reading process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this pre-reading process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new entry to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 has been detected in the current start winning process (see FIG. 30). (S501) If a new ball entry has not been detected (S501: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that a new ball entry has been detected (S501: Yes), next, whether the number of holding balls corresponding to the detected ball entry is the upper limit (that is, 4) It is determined whether or not it is (S502), and when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the number of holding balls is less than the upper limit (S502: No), whether or not the timing of starting the variable display based on the entering ball is the definite variation state of special symbol It is determined (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not it is a definite change state, according to the current gaming state and the pre-read result of the holding ball held before the current ball entry. Specifically, if a big hit is not included in the holding ball, the current gaming state coincides with the timing of starting the variable display based on the currently detected ball, so the current gaming state is a definite change state It is determined that Further, when the big hit is included in the holding ball, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of big hit. Specifically, when a definite variation jackpot is suspended, it shifts to a definite variation state after the big hit, and when a big win is normally suspended, it shifts to a normal state after the big hit. Taking these into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry is a definite change state.

  In the process of S503, when it is determined that the start time of the fluctuation based on the currently detected ball entry is a definite variation state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance slot where the entry ball is detected and The lottery result based on the current entry is acquired based on the first hit random number table (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start time is the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), based on the type of the entrance into which the ball is detected and the first hit random number table for low probability. Then, the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

  In the process of S506 executed after the process of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance to which the current ball is detected and the lottery result acquired in the process of S504 or S505. (S506), this processing ends. The winning information information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance and the lottery result notified by the prize information command in the prize information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed in the second symbol display device 83 or the first ball entry port It is a process for controlling the open time etc. of the motorized accessory 64a attached to 64.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). The opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83 as the inside of the normal symbol (the second symbol). Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602). If the display mode 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state of a normal symbol (S608). In addition, as above-mentioned, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the period used as the definite variation state of a special symbol and the period used as the time saving state of a normal symbol correspond. Therefore, in the process of S608, when the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on, it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is performed, and when it is off, the normal condition of the normal symbol is determined.

  When it is determined in the process of S608 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is determined (S608: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, and the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability Based on the drawing, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 14 (b)).

  If it is determined in the process of S608 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not determined (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of 0 to 4, 29 to 239 " It is determined that the symbol is dislocated (see FIG. 14 (b)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S609 or S610 is a hit of the normal symbol (S611), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol (S611: Yes), The display mode of the hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the time saving state of the normal symbol (the probability variation flag 203g is on) (S614), and if it is the time shortening state of the normal symbol (S614: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 Is set to 3 seconds (S615), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not set (that is, the probability variation flag 203g is off) (S614: No), the variation display fluctuation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S616), this processing ends.

  Moreover, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the change time of the change display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S617). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S615 or the processing of S616.

  When it is determined in the process of S617 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Are set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 62) is performed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S619). If the current lottery result is a hit of a normal symbol (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the short symbol state of the normal symbol is in progress (that is, the probability change flag 203g is on) (S620). If it is not inside (S620: No), the opening time of the motorized symbol 64a attached to the first entrance 64 and the opening number are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S621), and the process is performed Move to S523. On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that there is a time symbol of the normal symbol (S620: Yes), the opening time and number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 are "one second It is set to "2 times" (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

  In the process of S623, the open time determined in the process of S621 or S622 and the open / close control start of the open frequency are set (S623), and the process is ended. When start of the opening / closing control of the motorized workpiece 64a is set by the process of S623, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is performed next. The opening and closing control is started, and the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S621 or S622 end. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and it is judged whether or not the passing of the ball in the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 has occurred, and the passing of the ball has occurred. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: No), or, even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 If not (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 35, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the processing shifts to S914 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S914. As described later in the process of S1015 in FIG. 36, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S914). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S 915, S 916) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S 915, S 916) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S915, S916), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the process of S916 ends, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the process of S910 is completed, the probability change flag 203g is read (S911), and a state command is set based on the read status of the probability change flag 203g. This state command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the current gaming state. After the process of S912 ends, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter updating process of S1009 and S1010 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) and the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning combination information command set in the start winning combination processing is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when the gaming state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the gaming state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or the ball has won the specified number. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1004 ends, next, in the small hitting state, small hitting control processing for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1005). In the small hitting control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened at the start of the small hitting, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed during the opening period of the small hitting, or whether the ball has won the specified number. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the small hitting control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the small hitting control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1005 is completed, next, the motor-operated article opening and closing process is executed to perform the opening and closing control of the motorized article 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S1006). In the motorized accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized accessory 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 64a is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or the process of S522 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In addition, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (the first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, the second symbol display device 83 when the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set by the processing of S515 or the processing of S516 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 32). Start the variable display at. Thereby, in the second symbol display device 83, the variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the normal symbol (the second symbol) and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 Ends the fluctuation display and displays the stop symbol (the second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S512 or the processing of S513 of the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 32). (Lights up)

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010) ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010: No), the time until the predetermined time is reached, ie, the time to the execution timing of the next main process Within the remaining time, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1011, S1012).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value (both 399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 34 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  In addition, the processing of S1009 is the timing when the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or the timing when one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S901. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, in the process of initialization (see S901 in FIG. 35). The process of S1001 can be started by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value). Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a Is a process for opening or closing the

  In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the opening period of the jackpot is set (S1102). The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1102, the large hit medium flag 203r is set to ON (S1103), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1001 that it is not the start timing of the jackpot of the special symbol (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1104). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1004, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1104: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105), and if it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes The jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106), and the present process is ended. The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of ending effect (S1107). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all rounds of the jackpot) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time is ended, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S1107 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: Yes), an ending command is set (S1108), and this process is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (refer to FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1107 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1109). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that the end timing of the jackpot is determined (S1109: Yes), then the jackpot end processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S1110), and the present processing is ended. Do. The details of the jackpot end process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the big hit (special game state) (S1109: No), the winning process for performing processing according to the winning on the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1111) . The details of the winning process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After completion of the winning process (S1111), an abnormal process is executed to determine whether the ball entering the specified winning opening 65a has been discharged normally (S1112), and the process is ended. The details of the abnormality processing (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1106). The jackpot operation setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

  When the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) is started, first, the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S1201), and it is then determined whether it is the start timing of one round (S1202). When it is determined in the process of S1202 that it is the start timing of one round (S1202: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1202 that the current round is not the first round, the process of S1203 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1204. In the process of S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1204), and the process ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 (see S4404 in FIG. 48). Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

  By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of jackpot, and the special discharge flow path 65e2 can be set to be allowed to pass in the first round. it can. As a result, in the jackpots A to D, the ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3 almost certainly only by the player hitting the right in the first round, so that the probability changing mode (special variation of the symbol, and , It can be shifted to the time saving state of the normal symbol. Also in the case of the jackpots E and F, although the channel solenoid (probable solenoid) 65k is set to ON in the first round, as described above, the open period of the open / close door 65f1 is extremely short (0.2 seconds), Since it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during one round, the possibility of the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3 is almost zero. Therefore, when it becomes either of jackpot E or F, after the jackpot end can be set to the normal mode. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol in which any type of jackpot A to C is determined when the jackpot becomes a lottery that is advantageous for the player, and the jackpot becomes a high probability (95% A lottery of the second special symbol in which one of the jackpots E and F is determined by the ratio) can be made a lottery disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S1110). The jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end.

  In the jackpot end process (S1110), first, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S1301). If it is determined in the process of S1301 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1301: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, so the probability variation flag 203g is set to be on Then, the state after the big hit is set to the definite change mode (S1302), and the process proceeds to the process of S1303. On the other hand, if the probability variation setting flag 203h is off in the process of S1301 (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1303. Since the probability change flag 203g is reset to off at the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 28), skipping the process of S1302 turns the probability change flag 203g off after the jackpot. That is, after the big hit ends, the normal mode is set.

  In the process of S1303, a state command is set based on the state of the probability change flag 203g (S1303). The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. When receiving the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the game state storage area 223h in accordance with the gaming state notified by the state command. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped. Next, the jackpot flag 203r and the probability variation setting flag 203h are both set to off (S1304), and the process ends.

  By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 39), it is possible to accurately set the gaming state after the jackpot end depending on whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during jackpot.

  Next, the details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning on the specific winning opening 65a.

  In this winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the current period is a round effective period (S1401). Here, the round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S1401, if it is not a round effective period (S1401: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the present is a round effective period (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a winning on the specified winning opening 65a is detected (S1402). If a winning is detected (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j and updated (S1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning to the specific winning opening 65a has been detected is set (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if a winning on the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 and S1404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1405.

  In the process of S1405, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405), and if the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1405 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406), and the round time has elapsed. (S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. In the process of S1406, if the present big hit is a big hit A to D, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if 30 seconds have passed from the start of the round, and if the big hit E or F, the start of the round It is determined that the round time has elapsed when 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the

  In the process of S1407, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and a closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specified winning combination opening 65a this time is closing based on the end of one round (S1409) and when it is determined that closing is based on the end of one round (S1409: Yes), the channel solenoid The (probable change solenoid) 65k is set to OFF (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1409 that the closing of the specific winning hole 65a this time is closing due to the completion of a round other than one round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is on. Is not set, the process of S1410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the probability variation effective flag 203n, and the round end flag 203t are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. If the value of the winning number counter is determined to be 6 or less in the process of S1405 (S1405: No) and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), S1407 The processing of S1411 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1412.

  In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag 203t is on (S1412), and if the round end flag 203t is off (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1412 that the round end flag 203t is on (S1412: Yes), it is then determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203n is on (S1416). In the process of S1416, if the probability variation effective flag 203n is off (S1416: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation effective flag 203n is on (S1416: No), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation effective timer 203o (S1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation effective timer 203o is the upper limit ( S1418). Then, if the value of the probability variation effective timer 203o is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S1413 to monitor the probability variation switch 65e3 and execute the processing of updating the probability variation setting flag 203h. Thereby, if the probability variation effective timer 203o is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so the probability variation state can be set in consideration of the time of the ball. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being given by causing the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass the ball illegally.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is the upper limit (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203n and the round end flag 203t are set to OFF (S1419), and the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is reset (S1420) ), End this processing.

  Further, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1413), and if the ball has not passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1413: No), the process proceeds to S1414. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i (S1414), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1413). Finish.

  Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormality process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, determines whether or not the ball entering the specified winning hole 65a has been discharged normally. It is a process for

  In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the present is a round effective period (S1501), and if it is not a round effective period (S1501: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a round effective period (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1502).

  When it is determined in the process of S1502 that the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharged number counter 203p (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 in the process of S1502 (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203k is off (S1504: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504: Yes), since the ball is being brushed, the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is incremented by 1 and updated (S1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), next, the number of discharged items (total value of the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the value of the discharged number counter 203p) It is determined whether or not the number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

  If it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of discharged items and the number of winning are not identical (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process moves to the process of S1509. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent action of causing the ball to illegally enter the special discharge flow channel 65e2 and pass the probability change switch 54e3 while the special discharge flow channel 65e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1507 that the discharged number and the winning number match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is reset (S1510). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharged number counter 203p, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S1511), and the process is ended.

  By executing this abnormality process (see FIG. 41), the ball that has entered the specified winning hole 65a is not normally discharged due to the occurrence of a ball clogging etc. inside the variable winning device 65, etc. It can be detected and reported early.

  Next, the details of the small hitting control process (S1005) will be described with reference to FIG. The small hitting control process is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 when the small hitting condition is established, as described above.

  In this small hitting control process (refer to FIG. 42), first, it is judged whether it is the start timing of the small hitting (S1601), and when it is judged that it is the start timing of the small hitting (S1601: Yes) The opening command indicating the opening of the win is set (S1602), the small hit middle flag 203s is set to ON (S1603), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the start timing of the small hit is not reached (S1601: No), then it is determined whether the small hit is in progress (S1604). If it is determined that the small hit is not in progress (S1604) : No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit is in progress in the process of S1604 (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a based on the small hit ( S1605) If it is the start timing of the opening operation (S1605: Yes), opening of the specific winning opening 65a (opening of the open / close door 65f1) is set (S1606), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1605 that it is not the start timing of the opening operation (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607), and if it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607: Yes), an ending command indicating that the small hitting ending period has started is set (S1608), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1607 that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1607: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S1609). (S1609: Yes), the small hitting middle flag 203s is set to OFF (S1610), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1609 that it is not the end timing of the small hitting (S1609: No), the small hitting middle winning processing for determining the end of the opening period of the small hitting is executed (S1611). The details of the small hitting middle winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the small hit middle winning process (S1611) is completed, abnormal processing is executed to determine whether the number of balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a matches the number of balls discharged (S1612), and this processing ends Do. This abnormality process (S1612) is the same process as the abnormality process (see FIG. 41) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and thus the details thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the small hitting middle winning process (S1611) for determining the end of the small hitting open period will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the small hitting middle winning process (S1611). In the small hitting middle winning process (S1611), first, it is judged whether or not it is in the round effective period of the small hit (S1701), and when it is judged that the round effective period is out (S1701: No) End the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1701 that it is a round effective period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball winning in the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1702), and the ball winning is detected. If it is determined (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is not detected in the process of S1702 (S1702: No), the process of S1703 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1704.

  In the process of S1704, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704), and if less than 7 (S1704: No), then the round time (0.2 seconds) elapses It is determined whether it has been done (S1705). If it is determined in the process of S1705 that the round time has not elapsed (S1705: No), this process is ended as it is in order to continue the small hitting open period. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1704 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704: Yes), and if it is determined that the round time has elapsed in the process of S1705 (S1705: Yes) Since it means that the end condition of the small hitting open period is established, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1706), and the present process is ended.

  In addition, it is almost impossible to win seven or more balls to the specified winning hole 65a in 0.2 seconds which is the round time of the small hit, so when it comes to the small hit, it is almost specified After the winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds, the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S4116 (see FIG. 45) is performed by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S4002). As described later with reference to FIG. 45, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 45), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S4116. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S4116 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written by the processing of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1616 after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the start of the process is started, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

  In the process of S4002, if the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S4116, The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined in the process of S4005 that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( S4006), the process proceeds to S4008. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not.

  On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 in the process of S4005 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is performed (see S4115 in FIG. 45). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is performed, the process of S4008 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where it is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  After the process of S4010, the contents of notification of the state command set in the start-up process (see FIG. 31) are analyzed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 (S4011), and the gaming state storage area 223h according to the analysis result. The data of are updated (S4012). Thus, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time of power on. After the process of S4012, the interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is, for example, that the start processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in this case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the clear processing of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the processing of S4010 to S4013 is executed, and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  When the process of S4009 skips the process of S4009 when the process of S4008 is performed via the processes of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous S4101 process has been executed (S4101), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S4101: No), the processing proceeds to S4111 without performing the processing of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, the process of determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is mainly the process of displaying (representing) S4102 to S4110, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S4111 and the variable display setting processing of S4112 in a short cycle. Since the process of S4111 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S4102 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S4104). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S4107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S4110 ends, the process moves to the process of S4111. In the process of S4111, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S4111). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S4113 that the occurrence information of the power-off is stored (S4113: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are both set to ON (S4115), and the power is turned off. The process is executed (S4116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the command determination processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been made (S4201). If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4202), and the variation pattern type is received from the variation pattern command Are extracted (S4203), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4201 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4204). When the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4204 that the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), it is then determined whether the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4207) . When it is determined that the ball holding number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the value contained in the ball holding number command received, that is, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 Of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display based on the second special symbol), and this value Are stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (S4208). Further, in the process of S1708, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is set. . After the process of S4208 ends, the process ends.

  Here, when the ball has won the first ball entry 64 or the second ball entry 640 (start winning), or when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, the command for holding ball number is given from the main control unit 110 As it is transmitted, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special are processed by the processing of S08 every time a start winning is detected or each time a lottery of a special symbol is performed. The value of the symbol holding ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e even when the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. In addition, when the processing of S4208 is executed, the holding balls for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c. Several commands are set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S4207 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is next determined whether a state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the gaming state storage area 223h is updated according to the received command (S4210). That is, when the probability change mode is notified based on the information corresponding to the gaming state (whether or not it is a definite change state) notified by the state command, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223h is set to "11B". While being set, when the normal mode is notified, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223h are set to "00B". Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received (S4211). If it is determined in the process of S4211 that the winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning information command processing for executing control according to the prefetch result of the new start winning notified by the winning information command is executed. Then (S4212), the process ends. The details of the winning information command process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S4211 that no prize information command has been received (S4211: No), then whether or not a command related to the jackpot (an opening command, a round number command, or an ending command) has been received. It is determined whether or not (S4213). When it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has been received (S4213: Yes), the jackpot related processing for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S4214). End the process. The details of the jackpot-related processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received in the process of S4213 (S4213: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (S4215), and the process ends. In the processing of S4215, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command To send the display control device 114 to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the above-described winning information command process (S4212) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing winning information command processing (S4212).

  In the winning information command process (see FIG. 47), first, information notified by the received winning command (information indicating the type of the entrance which has detected a new start winning and information indicating the lottery result), the winning information storage area 223a Are stored in the corresponding storage area of (S4301). When the process of S4301 ends, next, it is determined whether the information notified by the prize information command this time is prize information of the second special symbol (S4302). If it is determined in the process of S4302 that the information notified this time is not the winning information of the second special symbol (it is the winning information of the first special symbol) (S4302: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current winning information is the second special symbol winning information (S4302: Yes), it is determined whether the current is a big hit A to D is being executed (S4303), the big hit If it is determined that any of A to D is being executed (S4303: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the ending period is in progress (S4304), and the adventurer 811 is not in the ending period. The aspect of the key 813 in the effect (see FIG. 8B) for finding the key 813 is selected (S4305). In the process of S4305, if it is the prize information corresponding to the lottery result of the present prize information being out (small hit), the ratio of selecting the key 813 of the luxurious mode becomes high, and the present prize information is jackpot E, F In the case of the prize information corresponding to, the ratio of selecting the key 813 in a poor phase (corrupted) becomes high. When the process of S4305 ends, an effect for finding the key 813 of the mode selected in the process of S4305 is set (S4306), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot A to D is not being executed in the process of S4303 (S4303: No), and if it is determined that the jackpot is for the jackpot of A to D in the process of S4304 (S4304: Yes) As a result of the player hitting the right during the period to hit the left, it means that the start winning for the second entrance 640 has been detected, so stopping the right hitting and returning to the left hitting The warning effect for notifying the person is executed (S4307), and the process ends. This warning effect (not shown) is more strongly left-handed on the player than the character “left-handed” and the image of the arrow pointing leftward displayed on the display area HR1 during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. The presentation of the aspect which instruct | indicates is performed. Specifically, for example, the character "left-handed" is displayed largely on the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the sound "Please return to left-handed" is repeatedly flowed at the maximum volume. Be done. By executing this warning effect, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from performing right-handling in a situation other than the execution of the jackpots A to D. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the player continues to strike the right during the normal mode or the definite variation mode, and the lottery of the disadvantageous second special symbol is continuously executed.

  By executing the prize information command process, it is possible to appropriately set the aspect of the key 813 to be found in the jackpot based on the new prize information of the second special symbol. Therefore, during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation for the player to be the probability change mode based on the aspect of the key 813. Can improve the interest for

  In the first embodiment, the selection ratio of the mode of the key 813 can be varied according to whether or not the winning information of the second special symbol simply notified by the winning information command is out (small hit). In this configuration, the mode of the key 813 is selected based on not only the winning information based on the new winning information command but also the winning information on the second special symbol already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is also good. Specifically, for example, before receiving the current winning information command, the winning information corresponding to one of the jackpots E and F is among the winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. If the key 813 is included, the ratio of selecting the key 813 in a poor phase (corrupted) may be high regardless of the lottery result of the current prize information. By configuring in this manner, it is more likely that the player 8 has a possibility that the big hit E, F is included in the holding ball of the second special symbol, as the key 813 of the poor phase (corrupted) aspect is continued. It can be estimated more accurately whether or not the big hit E, F is included in the holding ball. In addition, for example, when all of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a before the current winning information command and the current winning information command are received (small hit), the selection ratio is An aspect (for example, an aspect of the key 813 made of diamond) may be provided to be high (or selected in this case). By configuring in this manner, when the aspect is displayed, it is possible to further enhance the sense of expectation for transition to the positive change mode.

  In the first embodiment, when the prize information command corresponding to the second entrance 640 is received outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the warning effect is performed, but the present invention is limited thereto. is not. Even when detecting a new ball entering the second entrance 640 while the holding ball of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit value, a warning effect is executed if it is outside the execution period of the jackpot A to D It is good also as composition. In particular, during the end of the jackpot A to D, and during the execution of the first variable display, it is very likely that the holding ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit value. In such a case, if the player is hitting the right, a new starting winning combination may be generated at the second entrance 640 and after the big hit, the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed five times or more. There is a risk that the player will lose money. On the other hand, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected outside the execution period of jackpots A to D, the player may lose a loss by setting the warning effect. Can be suppressed (prevented).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the jackpot related processing (S4214) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this jackpot-related process (S4214).

  In the jackpot related process, it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4401), and if an opening command has been received (S4401: Yes), a display opening command is set (S4402). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect for informing the start of the big hit. When the process of S4402 ends, the present jackpot related process (see FIG. 48) ends. In addition, when the opening command this time is a command corresponding to the opening of the jackpot E, F, or the small hit, and the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed, the door breakthrough mode The production continues as it is. In this case, the opening command itself may not be output to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 determines whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed and selects the effect mode. It may be configured to

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the opening command has not been received (S4401: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4403). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4403: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received number of rounds command (S4404), and the number-of-rounds command for display corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is set (S4405). The round number command for display set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After the processing of S4405, this processing ends. As in the case where the opening command is received, when the start timing of a new round of the jackpots E and F comes during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the door breakthrough mode effect is continued as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the round number command has not been received (S4403: No), it is then determined whether a closing command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4406). When it is determined that the closing command has been received (S4406: Yes), closing command processing for performing control according to the situation in which the closing command is received is executed (S4406), and this processing is ended. The details of the closing command process (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S4405 that the closing command has not been received (S4405: No), it is then determined whether the ending command has been received (S4407). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4407: Yes), ending command processing for performing control according to the type and status of the ending command is executed (S4408), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the ending command has not been received (S4407: No), this process is ended as it is. By executing this jackpot-related process, appropriate control can be performed according to various commands related to the jackpot.

  Next, the details of the above-mentioned closing command processing (S4406) will be described with reference to FIG. In this closing command process (S4406), first, it is determined whether the type of jackpot being executed is any of jackpots A to D (S4501), and if it is judged that jackpots A to D are any ((4) S4501: Yes), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the running jackpot is other than the jackpot A to D (that is either jackpot E or F) (S4501: No), then the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is a value greater than 0 (Ie, whether the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed) or not is determined, and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed). When it is determined that (S4502: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4502: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S4503) Then, it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after subtraction has become 0 (that is, it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect) (S4504). When it is determined in the process of S4504 that the counter value after subtraction is 1 or more (S4504: No), this process is ended as it is in order to continue the door breakthrough mode effect. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after subtraction becomes 0 (S4504: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, so it passes over the remaining period until the end of the jackpot A result display is set (S4505), and this processing ends. In addition, a result display shows the display content on which the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 displays the number of award balls of the sum paid out by repetition of this jackpot and definite variation mode, the number of jackpots, and the like. By setting this result display, it is possible to easily grasp the number of jackpots won by the player, the number of winning balls obtained, and the like, so that the player can feel a sense of achievement.

  Next, the details of the above-mentioned ending command process (S4408) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the ending command process (S4408) is a process for performing control according to the jackpot type, the game status, and the like when the ending command is received.

  In this ending command processing, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is the ending command indicating the ending of the small hit (S4601), and if it is determined that the ending of the small hit is (S4601: Yes) The small hitting control processing for performing control according to the timing which ends the control processing is executed (S4602), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4601 that the small hitting is not ending (S4601: No), the current ending command is output to notify that the big hitting ending institution has been started. Therefore, it is determined whether the jackpot under execution is any of jackpots A to D (S4603).

  If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the jackpot in progress is not any of the jackpots A to D (S4603: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot under execution is any of jackpots A to D (S4603: Yes), the winning information of the second special symbol is read out from the winning information storage area 223a (S4604), and the read winnings are read. It is determined whether or not the jackpot D is included in the lottery result of the holding ball of the second special symbol indicated by the information. As described above, the jackpot D is an advantageous jackpot type in which only a large number of prize balls can be obtained among jackpots of the second special symbol and a probability variation mode is set after the jackpot.

  In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the jackpot D is included in the hold (S4605: Yes), a special mode door breakthrough mode in which it is reported that the jackpot has become a jackpot during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect An effect is set (S4606), and this processing ends. As described above, after the jackpots A to D have ended, it is basically advantageous for the player if all the holding balls of the second special symbol come off. If it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is because it becomes one of the disadvantageous big hit E, F with high probability (rate of 95%). However, if the second special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, it may be a jackpot D advantageous to the player with a low probability (5% rate). In this case, since it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls and the door breakthrough mode effect is set again after the big hit, it is advantageous for the player compared with the big hit E, F. Therefore, in this case, by setting the door breakthrough mode effect of the special notification mode, the player can easily understand that the jackpot D has been achieved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the big hit D is not included in the holding ball of the second special symbol (S4605: No), 4 is set to the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S4607), Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit is included in the holding balls of the second special symbol (S4608). If it is determined in the process of S4608 that a big hit is included, it means that either big hit E or F will be made during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and transition to the normal mode will be made after the big hit ends. Finally, a door breakthrough mode effect is set in a mode (a mode where failure to break through the door fails) informing the fall to the normal mode (S4609), and the present process is ended. In addition, as presentation time of door breakthrough mode production, 5.8 seconds which is the same production time is set irrespective of whether or not a big hit is included. In this 5.8 seconds, when all the holding balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), it is from when the ending agency is started until the small hit based on the fourth holding ball is finished It is a period. That is, in order to make it difficult for the player to guess whether there is a big hit in the holding ball from the presentation time, the presentation time of the door breakthrough mode presentation is made the same time (4.8 seconds) regardless of the result .

  In the process of S4608, when it is determined that the big hit is not included in the holding ball (S4608: No), the door breakthrough mode effect of the mode of finally notifying the transition to the positive change mode is set (S4610) ), End this processing. By executing this ending command process (see FIG. 50), it is possible to set an appropriate rendering mode according to the content of the holding ball of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the above-described small hitting end process (S4602) will be described. The small hitting end process (S4602) is a process executed when it is determined in the ending command process (see FIG. 50) that the received ending command is a small hitting ending command.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the small hitting end process (see FIG. 51), first, whether or not the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is a value larger than 0 (that is, whether door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) If the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (S4701: No), this means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being performed, and the process ends. It should be noted that the case where a small hit occurs outside the execution period of the door breakthrough mode effect is that the player has made a right-hand strike outside the execution period of jackpots A to D (period in which the left strike should be made) is there. In this case, when the start winning for the second entrance 640 is detected, the warning effect is set by the processing of S4307 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 47), so the player has already returned to the left It is thought that Therefore, at the end of the small hit, the control such as performing the warning effect again is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by repeating the warning effect even though the player has returned to the left.

  If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (S4701: Yes), then the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S4702), and the counter value after subtraction is 0 It is judged whether it becomes (S4703). If it is determined in the process of S4703 that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g has become 0 (S4703), the door breakthrough mode effect is ended with the lottery result of the small hit (ie, all the door breakthrough mode effects being produced) Since this means that the fluctuation has come off, a rendering mode indicating entry into the probability change mode is set (S4704), and the processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4703 that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S4703: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect End the process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4801). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S4801: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S4806. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4802), and then S4803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46). In the processing of the above, the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4803).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S 4804). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4805), and the process proceeds to S4806. In the process of S4805, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area.

  In the process of S4806, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4806). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S4806: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4807), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In step S4808, the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4808). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4808 (S4809), and the process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display stop type command, control is performed so that the third symbol display device 81 performs stop display of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Be done.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 53 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S610, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after the other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 53). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S6001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 54, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S610 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S610 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S6101. And after repeating the process of S6102 several times including the process of S610-S6105 may be performed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the video RAM 235 for residence (S6003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 64A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S7502 of FIG. 64A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B), a simple command is made so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and the simplified display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 55B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is If there is a display fluctuation pattern command from the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control unit 113, the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation presentation period, a simple fluctuation It is possible to make a presentation. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55 (a), a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 55 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so the normal effect image is not the third power pattern but the power-on image. The command determination process (S6302) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60.

  In the display setting process (S6303), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S6304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 26 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, small hit, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach completely out) The stop type table corresponding to is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S6402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: YES), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing (S6405). The variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S650. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the explanation will return to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S6406: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A to F, small hit, reach out, complete out, etc.) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Finally, the stop symbol after the variation effect to be played is set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S6602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Referring back to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S6701). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 6704). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a command for the number of rounds (S6410: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S6805), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6901, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), a rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 60A, details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 60 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001) . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each of the back image types (back surfaces A and B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. .

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S7002 is The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the explanation will return to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). For example (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (b). FIG. 60 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the explanation will return to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  In the process of S6401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S6308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 57 (b)) which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 57A) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image, which are set and necessary in that case, are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, in the process of S6502, the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 61, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7201: No ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S7301).

  In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S7203, the process proceeds to S7205.

  At S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, then in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not (S7402). As a result, if it is the End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), end this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S7402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and for each sprite, It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display is not yet performed and the finalized display is performed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the fixed display effect Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 7217), and the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S7221), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S6309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display the image of the above image in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 64 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S7501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (S7502) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 64 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S7602 (S7602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the video RAM 235 for residence. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S7603, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process is ended. Accordingly, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 55B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) (see S7501: No in FIG. 64A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S7705: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S7706 (S7706: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer processing has ended (S7706: Yes), the processing proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7705: No), the process moves to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag Is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the back image change flag is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal image transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, it is indicated by the display stop type command. If it is determined that the stop type information to be executed is the stop type of the big hit, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list (see FIG. 26) is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the type of storage RAM storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304) The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 7802). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 55 (b)) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a position where the ball is likely to enter easily when left-handed (a game method of firing a ball toward the flow path on the left side in the front view of the game board 13) The ball is more likely to enter when the first ball entry port 64 arranged in the right and the right strike (the game method of firing the ball toward the flow path on the right side in the front view of the game board 13) And the second ball inlet 640 disposed at a position where the ball is difficult to enter the ball). If the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery that is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it will be a disadvantage for the player if there is a jackpot (a prize ball is hardly obtained in the jackpot) It is highly likely that after the jackpot it will shift to the disadvantageous normal mode), but if it becomes a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the game It is configured to be highly likely to be advantageous to the person (in addition to obtaining a large number of winning balls in the jackpot, and shifting to the advantageous probability change mode after the jackpot). This makes it possible for the player to think that he / she wants to execute the lottery of the first special symbol which is more advantageous than the lottery of the disadvantageous second special symbol.

  In addition, in the flow path on the right side in the front view of the game board 13, there is provided a specific winning opening 65a which is opened during a big hit and a large number (11) of winning balls are paid out each time a ball enters. As with the second ball entry port 640, this specific winning hole 65a enables the ball to enter the ball when entering the right (entering easy), and the ball can not enter when passing the left (does not enter the ball) It is provided at the position where For this reason, it is necessary to hit the ball to the right in order to win the ball to the specific winning hole 65a and obtain the winning ball during the jackpot. As described above, when the ball is hit to the right, the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, so that after the big hit, the holding ball of the second special symbol can be stored to the upper limit. For this reason, after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to form a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous when the jackpot is made is continuously executed. A game can be played in hope that all the holding balls of a pattern will come off (small hit). That is, in a general pachinko machine, it is a preferable event for the player to become a big hit again in the hold after the big hit (so-called, hold in a row), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, It is possible to make the player perform in anticipation that there will not be a pending call-up. As a result, since it is possible to provide novel game characteristics different from those of general pachinko machines, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the first embodiment, each time the holding ball of the second special symbol increases during execution of jackpots A to D, the lottery result of the increased holding ball is pre-read, and the effect according to the pre-reading result Is configured to run. That is, it is configured to execute an effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result is out (small hit). More specifically, the adventurer 811 executes an effect of acquiring the key 813 in a mode according to the prefetching result of the increased holding ball lottery result. By this effect, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not to shift to the probability change mode during the jackpot from the aspect of the displayed key 813. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from becoming the work for simply obtaining the prize ball, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the jackpot game.

  In the first embodiment, the holding balls of the second special symbol are used from the ending period of the jackpot A to D until the fluctuation time of all the variable displays based on the holding balls of the second special symbol elapses. An effect of informing the player whether or not the jackpots E and F are present is executed. That is, even after all the variation display based on the second special symbol holding ball is finished, an effect is executed to indicate whether the gaming state remains in the definite change mode or falls to the normal mode. . By performing a series of effects over the ending period and the plurality of variable displays after the jackpot, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Moreover, in this 1st Embodiment, when it remove | deviates by the lottery of 2nd special symbol, it is set as the structure used as a small hit with high probability. And it is comprised so that the open period of specific winning a prize mouth 65a in the case of becoming a small hit, and the open period of opening-and-closing door 65f1 in each round of big hit E and F become the same (0.2 second). Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of the big hit E and F is configured to be one second which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol . By configuring in this way, even if any of the first to fourth reserved balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the big hit E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode effect is finished A series of opening and closing operations of the door 65f1 can be made the same as in the case where the probability change mode is notified (when the holding balls of all the second special symbols are small hits). That is, regardless of whether or not the big hit E, F is included in the holding ball of the second special symbol, as the operation of the open / close door 65f1 from the end of the big hit to the end of the door breakthrough mode effect , 1 second closing and 0.2 second opening can be unified into an operation that is repeated four times. Therefore, it is difficult to determine from the operation of the open / close door 65f1 after the big hit end whether it is the open / close operation due to the small hit being continuous or the open / close operation due to the big hit E or F. It is possible to make the door breakthrough mode effect pay attention to the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol may be performed in parallel. Since it becomes possible to become a big hit by the variable display of the 1st special symbol by being constituted in this way before the lottery of the disadvantageous 2nd special symbol is performed, during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect , Can be more aggressively left strike. In this case, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, the variation pattern of a long variation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined at a predetermined rate (for example, 10% rate) . By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the drawing of the first special symbol one or more times during long fluctuations of the second special symbol, so the chance of becoming a jackpot in the drawing of the first special symbol It can be formed.

  In the first embodiment, the left hit is notified from the start of the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the player can be informed that the player does not continue to hit the right after the end of the jackpot, for example, in the final round of the jackpot, displaying the number of remaining ball placements until the end of the final round. By displaying the characters etc., the player may be switched to left hitting immediately after the final round end condition is satisfied. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball enters into the 2nd ball entrance 640 after a big hit end.

  In the first embodiment, when the time is short of the normal symbol, the variation period of the normal symbol is uniformly 3 seconds, and the open period of the motorized accessory 64a is 1 second when the normal symbol is hit. Although the configuration is set to two times, it is not limited to this. For example, even after the jackpot is finished, only the first variation time of the normal symbol is set to a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the period until all the variation based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is all finished. Good. By configuring in this way, during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, it does not hit the normal symbol, so from the opening time of the normal symbol, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and in the low probability state of the normal symbol It can be difficult to determine if it has fallen or if the time saving condition of the normal symbol is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect.

  In the first embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is out, it is configured to be substantially small hit, but is not limited to this. For example, when the second special symbol has become out of place, instead of being configured to be simply out of all, the variation time in the case of a big hit is varied according to the number of big wins after variation, door breakthrough mode The period from the start of the production to the start of the jackpot of the second special symbol, and from the start of the door breakthrough mode production to the end of all the variable displays corresponding to the removal of the four second special symbols It may be configured to coincide with the period (period until transition to the positive change mode). More specifically, if the jackpot in the first second special symbol lottery after the jackpot, 4 seconds are set as the fluctuation time, and the jackpot in the second second special symbol lottery Is set to 3 seconds as a fluctuation time, and if it is a big hit in the third drawing of the second special symbol, 2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time, and it becomes a jackpot in the fourth drawing of the second special symbol In this case, one second may be set as the fluctuation time. By configuring in this way, in the case of a big hit in the middle of 4 seconds (1 second × 4), which is the total of the fluctuation time when the four second special symbol holding balls all come off, The period until the jackpot starts (4 seconds) can be made to coincide. Therefore, even if the jackpot of the second special symbol is included in the holding ball for 4 seconds after the big hit end which is the execution period of the door breakthrough mode effect, the specific winning hole 65a will not be opened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of knowing whether or not to shift to the probability change mode before the end of the door breakthrough mode effect from the operation of the specific winning a prize opening 65a. In addition, the period until the jackpot of the second special symbol is started after the door breakthrough mode effect is started is the variable display corresponding to the deviation of the second special symbol four times after the door breakthrough mode effect is started. The jackpot will not be started at least while the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed, provided that it is longer than the period until the completion of all the steps. Therefore, when it becomes a big hit of the 2nd special symbol only, it is good also as composition which sets up fluctuation time more than the sum total of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display corresponding to the omission of the 2nd special symbol for 4 times.

  In the first embodiment, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the first to fourth rounds in the jackpots E and F and the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the small hitting are the same (0.2 seconds). However, it may be arbitrarily determined as long as the player can not distinguish whether the difference is the opening period of the big hit or the opening period of the small hit by the feeling. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous and the lottery of the first special symbol is advantageous, but it is not limited thereto. For example, the lottery of the second special symbol may be advantageous, and the lottery of the first special symbol may be advantageous. Then, when the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, the door breakthrough mode effect is executed to succeed in the door breakthrough, and when all the second special symbol lottery is out, the door fails to breakthrough. You may comprise so that the production | presentation to be performed may be performed. This makes it possible to realize a more easily understandable game characteristic of being a big hit if the door is successfully broken. Furthermore, in this case, the first ball entrance 64 may be deleted and only the second ball entrance 640 may be provided. That is, only the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed.

  In the first embodiment, while the change based on the holding ball of the second special symbol after the big hit is executed, it becomes difficult to understand whether it became the big hit or the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol As described above, the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set. However, it is not limited to the variation display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol that makes it hard to understand whether the jackpot or the jackpot. For example, even in the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot type in which the same operation as the small hit and the small hit (the same operation or an operation in which the player can not distinguish the small hit) is determined Good.

  In the first embodiment, the ending period of the jackpot is started whether or not the holding balls of the second special symbol held in the jackpot all come off (small hit) (transition to the positive change mode) or not Therefore, although it was set as the structure performed over the period until the lottery of all 2nd special symbols is complete | finished, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, at least a part of the transition to the definite variation mode, it may be configured to notify that the transition to the definite variation mode is made during the ending period. That is, at the start of the ending period, the lottery result of the holding ball of the second special symbol is read ahead, and if it is determined that all the prefetched results are out of order (small hits) It may be configured to notify the transition to the mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player more quickly that the transition to the probability change mode is made, so that the player can be pleased. In addition, when notifying the transition to the positive change mode during the ending period, an effect of breaking through four doors at once may be executed, or an effect different from the normal door breakthrough mode effect is executed. It is also good. Here, as an effect different from the normal door breakthrough mode effect, for example, an effect that the theme song of the adventurer 811 flows may be executed, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is blacked out. After that, the effect may be performed that the characters “probable change mode determination” are floating on the display screen. Furthermore, when the effect of deciding to shift to the definite variation mode is executed during the ending period, until the variation based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is completed (that is, until the definite variation mode is started) ) It is good also as composition which keeps running. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player who knew the transition to the definite change mode early (during the ending period), to the transition to the definite change mode in the remaining period until the transition to the definite change mode. Can be soaked in the afterglow. Thus, the player can be satisfied.

  Furthermore, it may be configured to notify that it shifts to the positive change mode before the ending period. More specifically, when the start winning combination corresponding to the fourth holding ball of the second special symbol is detected, and the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated based on the winning information command. , It is determined whether or not all the winning combination information of the second special symbol is off (small hit). Then, when all the winning combination information is out (small hit), it may be configured to execute an effect indicating transition to the probability change mode at that time. Note that, as the effect indicating the transition to the probability change mode, for example, an effect that the adventurer 811 discovers the key 813 in a special (premium) mode may be executed, for example, the display mode is as usual, and the jackpot The music flowing therein may be changed to a special (premium) one.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 84, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the normal discharge flow channel 65e1 and the special discharge flow channel 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow channel 65e2 is When the ball passes, the game state after the big hit was configured to be set to the probability change mode. In addition, as long as it passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation mode and the jackpot are repeated indefinitely.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming state after the big hit is determined in advance for each type of big hit. In addition, the upper limit is set to the number of consecutive times of the special symbol state of the special symbol, and when the upper limit is reached, the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol even if winning the probability variable jackpot There is.

  Further, in the above-described first embodiment, in order to prevent the player from hitting the right at the normal time (a state other than the big hit), when the start winning for the second ball entry 640 is detected at the normal time, It was configured to execute the warning effect.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the electric entry 640b is provided to the second entry opening 640, and the ball enters the second entry opening 640 normally under the influence of the attachment 64b. It is configured to be difficult to do. Also, during the jackpot state, by controlling the motorized accessory 640b provided accompanying the second entrance 640 so as to be easily released, the second special in the jackpot as in the first embodiment It is configured that the holding balls of the symbol are stored up to the upper limit number. In addition, by providing the motorized part 640b in accompaniment with the second ball entrance 640, the motorized article 64a provided in accompaniment with the first ball entrance 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. .

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and the like. The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially modified, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 is This is a point that has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the normal ball inlet (through gate) 67 is set to the flow passage on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Further, on the downstream side of the normal ball entry port 67, a variable winning device 650 and a second ball entry port 640 are provided. The variable winning device 650 is provided instead of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and as a winning opening in which 13 winning balls are paid out every time a ball wins on the specific winning opening 650 a of the variable winning device 650. It is configured. The specific winning opening 650a is configured to be variable between an open state where ball entry is possible (easier) and a closed state where ball entry is not possible (difficult), and opens in each round of the jackpot Set to state.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the second ball entry port 640 is provided with a motorized prize 640a. The motorized accessory 640a is variably configured in a closed position that prevents the ball from entering the second entrance 640 and an open position where the ball can enter the ball, and FIG. 67 shows the open position. The case where it is variable is illustrated. Although the details will be described later, the motorized work part 640a performs motion control so that the ball can enter the ball more easily in the low probability state of the normal symbol than in the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol. It will be. More specifically, although the probability of hitting the normal symbol is slightly higher than that of the low symbol of the normal symbol (199/240 → 200/240), the variation time of the normal symbol is long when the probability of the normal symbol is high. As it becomes (3 seconds → 30 seconds), the open period of the motorized accessory 640b in the case of normal symbol winning becomes shorter (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol as a total. Therefore, in the definite variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is difficult to enter the second entry ball opening 640 even if the player strikes the ball to the right, so the second special special It can suppress that the lottery of a symbol is performed. In addition, during the big hit that is usually set to the low probability state of the symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640, so it is easy to store the holding balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit .

  In addition, since the second winning ball inlet 640 is accompanied by the electric symbol 640b, the electric symbol 64a attached to the first ball entry 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. And, the special figure 1 small hitting winning device 655 is provided below the first ball entrance 64. When this special figure 1 small hitting prize winning device 655 becomes small hitting in the drawing of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 small hitting prize opening 655a is set to open state, the ball to the inside It becomes possible to enter the ball. In the second embodiment, the probability of becoming a small winning is greatly increased in the lottery of the first special symbol in the definite variation mode (1/1000-> 989/1000) configuration, and left hit during the definite variation mode The number of balls to be consumed and the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the ball to the special figure 1 small hitting winning opening 655a will be equal by the lottery of the first special symbol Is configured. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency when left hitting in the probability change mode without using the motorized accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the distributing member 660 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first embodiment is deleted, and the downstream side of the ordinary ball inlet (through gate) 67 Is branched in approximately three directions. That is, the flow path to the second ball entry port 640, the flow path to the variable winning device 650, and the out-port 66 without going to any of these (the second ball entry port 640 and the specified winning hole 650a). It branches into the flow path which flows down toward. By configuring in this manner, as in the first embodiment, a part of the ball shot for aiming at the specific winning hole 650a by right-handed hitting in the jackpot may be made to enter the second ball entrance 640. it can. Therefore, it can be set as the structure which the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol accumulates to upper limit number in a jackpot. As a result, even in the second embodiment, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that hope that all the lottery based on the holding balls of the second special symbol executed after the big hit will be out.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the flow path to the second ball entrance 640 by the plurality of nails, the flow path to the variable winning device 650, and the flow path to the out port 66. And. Therefore, by adjusting the nails by the store clerk in the hall, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the balls distributed to the second entrance 640 and the ratio of the balls distributed to the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, since adjustment can be performed in accordance with the management policy of the hall, the pachinko machine 10 with higher convenience can be realized.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the first random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (a).

  FIG. 68A shows the defined contents of the first random number table 202a in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the second embodiment, the range of possible values of the first type counter C1 is expanded to 0 to 999.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 9" is defined as the range of the judgment value determined to be the jackpot (see 202a1 in FIG. 68 (a)). In addition, the determination value which becomes a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol as in the first embodiment. In addition, “10 to 998” is defined as the range of judgment values determined to be out of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 68A), and the judgment value of the first special symbol determined to be a small hit "999" is specified as the range. In addition, “10, 11” is defined as the range of the judgment value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202 a 2 in FIG. “12 to 999” is defined as the range (see 202 a 3 in FIG. 68A).

  On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability state) of the special symbol, the range of the judgment value to be the big hit, the judgment value to be out of the way, and the range of the judgment value to be the small hit It is common with 2 special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), “0 to 10” is defined as the range of the judgment value judged to be a big hit (refer to 202a4 in FIG. 68 (a)), and the judgment judged to be out of step "11" is defined as the value (see 202a5 in FIG. 68A), and "12 to 999" is defined as the determination value determined to be the small hit (see 202a6 in FIG. 68A).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the probability of becoming a small hit in the first special symbol drawing is made different between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol In the first special symbol lottery, the probability of becoming a small hit is extremely high. As a result, the number of balls to be consumed when left hitting in the definite variation mode and the first special symbol lottery become small hits, and the balls enter the special figure 1 small hit winning opening 655a. The number of prize balls to be paid out is configured to be equal. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency when left hitting in the probability change mode without using the motorized accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

  In addition, the small hit of the second special symbol and the small hit of the first special symbol are configured to be different in the number of winning balls that the player can obtain, and the small hit of the first special symbol has more awards. It is configured to be able to acquire a ball. On the other hand, in the small hit of the second special symbol, as in the first embodiment, the specified winning opening 650a is only opened for 0.2 seconds, so it becomes difficult for the player to obtain a winning ball. Therefore, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 normally when hitting right at the time, and it is easy to determine an adverse jackpot type even if it becomes a big hit, and a prize ball even if it becomes a small hit. Since the player can hardly win, it is disadvantageous for the player as compared to the case of left strike. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method in which the right hitting is performed at the normal time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 68B is a diagram showing the definition content of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the second embodiment, three types of jackpots A2 to C2 are provided as jackpot types of the first special symbol, and jackpot D2 is provided as a jackpot type for the second special symbol. , E2 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the first special symbol, “big hit A2” is defined in association with the range of “0 to 9” of the first hit type counter C2 value. (See 202b1 in FIG. 68 (b)). This "big hit A2" is a big hit where the number of rounds is 16 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value to be "big hit A2" is 10, so "big hit A" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 10% (10/100). The "big hit A" is opened in each round of the big hit until the specified winning hole 650a has passed for 30 seconds or until six balls are won. Therefore, it is possible to make the upper limit number of balls (6 pieces) reach the specific winning hole 650a almost certainly before 30 seconds have elapsed, only by the player continuing to hit the right in each round. When it comes to jackpot A, a large number of balls can be won.

  With respect to the first special symbol, in the range of "10 to 69", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with "big hit B2" (see 202b2 in FIG. 68 (b)) . This "big hit B2" is a big hit where the number of rounds is 7 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit B2" is 60, so "big hit B2" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 60% (60/100). Like "big hit A2", this "big hit B2" is opened in each round of the big hit until the specified winning opening 650a passes for 30 seconds or until six balls are won. Therefore, it is possible to receive a large amount of prize balls as in the "big hit A2".

  With respect to the first special symbol, the "big hit C2" is defined in association with the range of "70 to 99" in the value of the first hit type counter C2 (see 202b3 in FIG. 68 (b)). . This "big hit C2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 2 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value which is "big hit C2" is 30, so "big hit C2" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 30% (30/100). This "big hit C2", like "big hit A2" and "big hit B2", in each round of the big hit, the specific winning opening 650a is opened until 30 seconds have passed or until 6 balls are won. . Accordingly, as in the "big hit A" and the "big hit B", it is possible to receive a large amount of prize balls.

  In this way, if it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, in addition to being able to receive the payout of prize balls for 2 rounds, 7 rounds, or 16 rounds, the gaming state after the big hit is almost certainly a definite change mode Therefore, it is advantageous for the player regardless of which jackpot type. In addition, since the number of rounds is relatively large, and the proportion in which 16 rounds are determined is high (the proportion of 70%), it is possible to anticipate the acquisition of a large number of prize balls when it becomes the jackpot of the first special symbol. Therefore, the player can be pleased when the player wins a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the second special symbol, “big hit D2” is defined in association with the range of “0 to 4” in the first hit type counter C2 value. (See 202b4 in FIG. 68 (b)). This "big hit D2" is a big hit where the number of rounds is 4 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit D2" is 5, so "big hit D2" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery Rate is 5% (5/100). The "big hit D2" is opened until 30 seconds have passed, or six balls have won, in each round of the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to receive a relatively large amount of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), for the second special symbol, "big hit E2" is defined in association with the range of "5-99" in the value of the first type counter C2 for the first hit. (See 202b5 in FIG. 68 (b)). This "big hit E2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit E2" is 95, so "big hit E2" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery Rate is 95% (95/100). This "big hit E2" is different from the other big hit types, and in each round of the big hit, the specific winning opening 650a is opened until 0.2 seconds have passed or six balls are won. Since it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning opening 650a in 0.2 seconds, the "big hit E2" is an adverse jackpot type in which the winning ball can not be obtained. In addition, as described above, the upper limit (4 times) is provided for the number of consecutive times of the special symbol's definite variation state, and when it reaches the maximum number of times, the game state after the big hit ends regardless of the big hit type It is configured to be in the disadvantageous normal mode. Therefore, when it becomes "big hit E", it is not possible to obtain a prize ball, and the number of times to shift to the normal mode is reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the winning ball can not be obtained with a high probability (ratio of 95%) and the remaining jackpot until the normal mode is set. The configuration is such that the jackpot type (jackpot E2) that reduces the number of times is determined. That is, as in the first embodiment, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is a big win, the possibility of becoming an undesirable result for the player is high. In this way, while the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol after the big hit is under execution, it is possible to realize the novel game characteristic that it is possible to play the game in hope that the lottery result will be out. Can.

  Next, details of the second random number table 202c in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 shows the specified contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 69, “5-203” is defined as the determination value for hitting the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 69). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as the determination value which is the hit of the normal symbol (see 202 c 3 in FIG. 69). That is, the number of determination values determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol differs by only one. Thereby, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the hit probability almost equal to the high probability state of the normal symbol.

  In addition, as described above, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer than the normal state of the normal symbol (3 seconds → 30 seconds), and the electric power when the normal symbol is hit The opening period of the special object 640b becomes short (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol as a total. Therefore, in the definite variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is difficult to enter the second entry ball opening 640 even if the player strikes the ball to the right, so the second special special It is possible to suppress that the lottery of the symbol is executed. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a situation other than the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and it is possible to suppress an excessive disadvantage for the player. In addition, during the big hit that is usually set to the low probability state of the symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640, so it is easy to store the holding balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 202. Referring to FIG. As shown in FIG. 70, in the configuration of the RAM 202 in the second embodiment, a probability variation limit counter 203aa and a breakthrough mode counter 203ab are added to the configuration of the RAM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18). They differ in that they Further, they differ in that the probability variation setting flag 203h, the probability variation passing counter 203i, the remaining sphere timer flag 203k, the remaining sphere timer 203m, the probability variation effective flag 203n, the probability variation effective timer 203o, and the discharged number counter 203p are deleted.

  The probability variation limit counter 203aa is a counter that counts the number of consecutive continuations of the probability variation state until the normal mode is set. When the normal mode is set as the state after the big hit ends, 4 which is the maximum number of continuous numbers in the positive state is set (see S1314 in FIG. 78), and this positive variable limit counter 203aa is set every time the positive net hit ends. The value is decremented by one (see S1311 in FIG. 78). When the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is updated to 0 at the end of the jackpot, it is set so that the jackpot end is in the normal mode.

  The breakthrough mode counter 203ab is a counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the door breakthrough mode effect, and at the end of the jackpot A2 to D2, the number of holding balls in the second special symbol is set as a counter value (see S1316 in FIG. 78). The value is updated by subtracting 1 at the start of fluctuation (see S324 in FIG. 73). In the second embodiment, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab (the number of remaining variations until the door breakthrough mode effect is finished) is included in the variation pattern command and transmitted. When the variation pattern command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 reads out the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab from the variation pattern command, and grasps the remaining number of variations until the door breakthrough mode effect is finished. In particular, since the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 does not back up the stored contents, if the power is shut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect after voice recovery is voice lamp controlled It can not be grasped by the device 113 side.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the information corresponding to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command and output to the voice lamp control device 113. Even if the power is shut off during execution and the stored contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are cleared, the door breakthrough mode effect is executed by analyzing the fluctuation pattern command received first after the power is restored It is possible to grasp whether it is medium and its progress. As a result, even when the power is shut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the effect can be resumed from the continuation of the door breakthrough mode effect after power recovery. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress that the effect content changes before and after the power is shut off, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect content.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a state transition method in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, three states, that is, the normal mode, the door breakthrough mode, and the positive change mode, are exchanged. In the second embodiment, the content of the door breakthrough mode is changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, the door breakthrough mode of the first embodiment described above is only a definite variation state of the special symbol and a time shortening state of the normal symbol, and shows only a state in which the holding ball of the second special symbol is present. In addition to this, in the second embodiment, the low probability state of the special symbol, and the normal state of the normal symbol, the state in which the holding ball of the second special symbol is also in the door breakthrough mode. Hereinafter, to simplify the explanation, the door breakthrough mode in which the special symbol in the definite variation state and the normal symbol time reduction state are set is referred to as the door breakthrough mode 1, and the special symbol low probability state, and The door breakthrough mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is referred to as a door breakthrough mode 2. The door breakthrough mode 1 is illustrated on the left side in the middle of FIG. 71, and the door breakthrough mode 2 is illustrated on the left side in the middle of FIG.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 71, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of transition to another state only when the jackpot is reached. Specifically, when it becomes a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, it always shifts to the door breakthrough mode. As described above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for a relatively long time (30 seconds at maximum) in each round of the jackpot, so aiming at the specific winning opening 650a in an attempt to obtain a winning ball. When the ball is thrown out, a large amount of ball enters the second ball entrance 640 as well. As a result, at the end of the jackpot, the holding ball of the second special symbol is accumulated up to the upper limit value, and after the jackpot becomes the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1).

  As shown in the middle of FIG. 71, in the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough modes 1 and 2), basically the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is completely out 2 There is a possibility of shifting to another state when the number of balls held for special symbol becomes 0. The state of the transition destination in the case of the jackpot is common in the door breakthrough mode 1 and 2, but the state of the transition destination when the number of holding balls in the second special symbol is 0 is the door breakthrough mode 1 and It is different in the door breakthrough mode 2. Specifically, in the door breakthrough mode 1, when the number of holding balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without becoming a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the positive variation mode (see middle left side in FIG. 71). In the probability change mode, by performing left strike, it is possible to execute only the drawing of the first special symbol advantageous to the player, and the probability of becoming a small hit is increased in the drawing of the first special symbol (for small hitting Since the winning opening 655a is likely to be opened), the game can be continued until the jackpot of the first special symbol is achieved with almost no reduction in holding balls. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. On the other hand, in the door breakthrough mode 2, when the number of holding balls of the second special symbol becomes zero without becoming a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode is shifted to the normal mode (see middle right of FIG. 71). In the normal mode, since the small hit probability is low, if you hit the left to run the first special symbol lottery, the ball will continue to decrease until the big hit, which is a disadvantage for the player compared to the definite change mode Become.

  As shown in the middle of FIG. 71, in the door breakthrough mode, when the jackpot E2 occurs in the second special symbol lottery, the condition is that the number of consecutive positive change states has not reached the upper limit, after the jackpot end Transition to the definite change mode (common to door breakthrough modes 1 and 2). As described above, the jackpot E2 has a short opening time (0.2 seconds) for the specific winning opening 650a, and can not win a winning ball even if the player hits the right. Further, also in the display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot E2 and the small hitting of the second special symbol are configured to notify left hitting. Therefore, unless the player intentionally strikes against the notification, the holding ball of the second special symbol will not be stored during execution of the jackpot E2, so after the jackpot E2 ends, it shifts directly to the definite change mode. Do. In this case, the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa, which counts the number of consecutive probability variation states until transition to the normal mode, is decremented by one. Therefore, when the jackpot E2 is reached, the number of probability change states is reduced without being able to obtain a winning ball, which results in an undesirable result for the player. For this reason, if the specific winning opening 650a repeats the opening operation for 0.2 seconds a plurality of times in the door breakthrough mode, the player is asked that the opening operation is all due to the small hit of the second special symbol. It is possible to realize the novel playability of making a wish come true.

  In the door breakthrough mode, the jackpot E2 of the second special symbol is set, and when the probability variation limit counter 203aa becomes 0 (the number of consecutive definite variation states reaches the upper limit), set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot Since it can not be done, the state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode presentation, presentation of an aspect in which the door breakthrough is failed is executed, and the transition to the normal mode is notified.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 71, when the jackpot D2 is won during the door breakthrough mode, the door breakthrough mode (either the door breakthrough mode 1 or the door breakthrough mode 2) is again performed after the termination of the jackpot D2. Migrate to More specifically, if the number of consecutive definite change states has not reached the upper limit, door breakthrough mode 1 (special change of the special symbol state and time symbol of the normal symbol) is set, and the consecutive number of definite change states is the upper limit. If it has reached, the door breakthrough mode 2 (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) is set. As described above, when the door breakthrough mode 1 is set, the player can shift to the probability change mode if the jackpot of the second special symbol does not become the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is set, if all the holding balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), it falls to the normal mode, so it is better to be a big hit .

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the definite change mode, when it becomes a jackpot of a special symbol, it shifts to another gaming state. Specifically, if the first special symbol is a big hit, and the number of consecutive definite change states has not reached the upper limit (the positive change limit counter 203aa is not 0), the door breakthrough mode is started after the end of the big hit. . On the other hand, when the number of consecutive definite change states has reached the upper limit (the positive change limit counter 203aa has become 0), the state after the big hit is set to the normal mode. In this case, it is informed that the number of consecutive contingencies has reached the upper limit during the jackpot. That is, the effect of informing that the state after the jackpot end is the normal mode is performed, for example, in the ending period of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol lottery in the door breakthrough mode, a winning ball can be obtained with a high probability (95% which is a ratio at which the jackpot E2 is determined). An undesirable result for the player is that the remaining number of consecutive times (the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa) of the probability variation state is subtracted. Therefore, in the door breakthrough mode, it is possible to play a game hoping that it will not be a jackpot of the second special symbol.

  In the door breakthrough mode effect of the second embodiment, an effect (see FIG. 10A) in which the breakthrough of the door fails once is executed when the jackpot E2 occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol. Ru. Then, if the number of continuous definite change states has not reached the upper limit (if the value of the definite change limit counter 203aa is not 0), the adventurer 811 tries to break through the door again by the so-called revival effect, and the break through of the door A successful presentation is performed. On the other hand, when it becomes the big hit E2 in the lottery of the second special symbol and the number of consecutive definite change states has reached the upper limit value, the reversion effect is not performed, and the process directly shifts to the normal mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize that the remaining number of consecutive times has decreased when the reversion effect is accompanied even when the mode is shifted to the definite variation mode.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the definite variation mode, the state shifts to another state only when a jackpot occurs in the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, the first special symbol is a big hit, and when the number of consecutive definite change states has not reached the upper limit, the door transition mode 1 is entered after the large hit end, and the number of continuous occurrences of positive change states has reached the upper limit number of times In the case, after the jackpot ends, the door transition mode 2 is entered.

  In addition, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is reached, if the holding balls of all the second special symbols are out (small hit) as the door breakthrough mode effect, the breakthrough of the door fails and the normal mode is entered. An effect of notifying the transition is performed. That is, an effect that is the reverse of the door breakthrough mode 1 (and the door breakthrough mode effect in the first embodiment) is performed. In the case of the jackpot E2 in the door breakthrough mode 2, as in the case where the remaining number of consecutive definite variation states remain in the door breakthrough mode 1, the definite variation mode is notified via the resurrection effect.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, two types of door breakthrough modes are provided. That is, in a state where the number of consecutive definite change states does not reach the upper limit, the door breakthrough mode 1 in which transition is made when any of the big hits A2 to D2 and the state where the consecutive number of definite change states reaches the upper limit (limit) In the case of the jackpot A2 to D2, there is provided a door breakthrough mode 2 in which transition is made. As in the first embodiment, the door breakthrough mode 1 shifts to the probability variation mode advantageous to the player when all the holding balls of the second special symbol are out (small hit), so the second special symbol It is better to not win a big win in the lottery. On the other hand, the door breakthrough mode 2 is a low probability state of the special symbol internally and a normal state of the normal symbol, and the upper limit of the continuous number of the probability change state is reset. Therefore, when all the holding balls of the second special symbol come off, the mode shifts to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this case, by becoming the jackpot of the second special symbol during the door breakthrough mode 2, it can be shifted to the door breakthrough mode 1 or the probability change mode, so it became a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery One is advantageous to the player. The second special symbol holding balls in the door breakthrough mode 2 will all come off (small hit), and if it shifts to the normal mode, it may consume a large amount of balls before becoming a big hit. It is.

  Depending on the type of door breakthrough mode, it would be advantageous for all the holding balls of the second special symbol to be advantageous, or for the jackpot to be included in the holding balls for the second special symbol. Therefore, when transitioning to the door breakthrough mode, it is possible to predict which mode the door breakthrough mode is. Then, according to the predicted type of mode, it is possible to expect the player to miss or expect a jackpot, so it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 223. Referring to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20B) in that a post-loading flag 223i is added. doing. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The flag 223i indicates that the door breakthrough mode is interrupted after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode, and then the power is turned on again and the door breakthrough mode is resumed. It is. The flag 223i is set to ON when it is determined that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and that it is a variation other than the last variation of the door breakthrough mode effect. (See S5102 in FIG. 82).

<About control processing of main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. First, the details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is a process that is executed instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment.

  Of the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S231) in this second embodiment, in each of S301 to S309 and S311, S301 to S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively The same process as each process of and S311 is performed.

  Further, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, after the variation pattern is determined in the process of S307 or S309, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S321), and the read counter value And a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 (S322).

  Further, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 73) in the second embodiment, after the process of S311 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is larger than 0 (S323). In the process of S323, when it is determined that the value of counter 203ab during breakthrough mode is larger than 0 (that is, door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S323: Yes), the value of counter 203ab during breakthrough mode is decremented by one. Then (S324), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S323 that the value of the breakthrough counter 203ab is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S323: No), the process of S324 is skipped. This processing ends as it is.

  In this special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 73), the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect (value of counter 203ab during breakthrough mode) may be included in the variation pattern command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the difference between the actual number of times that the door breakthrough mode effect is produced and the effect mode performed by the audio lamp control device 113. In particular, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily shut off, all the memory contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are cleared, so the situation of the door breakthrough mode effect before the power shut off is also a voice lamp. It becomes unknown on the control device 113 side. Even in this case, if the fluctuation pattern command is configured to include the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode, it is possible to easily remove the power supply simply by analyzing the fluctuation pattern command output first after power recovery. The voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the state of Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the effect mode before the power is shut off.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention, the situation where the holding ball of the 2nd special symbol exists is basically only during the jackpot and during the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, it seems that it may be sufficient if it is determined that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is 1 or more and the situation is not in the middle of a big hit. However, even in the case where the player normally strikes a right at will, the number of holding balls in the second special symbol may become one or more. In such a case, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the voice lamp control device 113 side is notified by notifying that the holding ball of the second special symbol is 1 or more by the holding ball number command when power is restored. There is a problem in that it is mistakenly recognized that the breakthrough mode effect is being executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect is included in the fluctuation pattern command and output, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more at the time of power recovery. It is possible to grasp whether the door breakthrough mode is being executed, or whether the player has just intentionally or accidentally hit the right. Therefore, it is possible to accurately restore the effect mode after power recovery to the state before the power is shut off.

  In the second embodiment, the number of changes until the door breakthrough mode effect is finished is grasped by the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode, and is included in the fluctuation pattern command and is output. Only the information on whether it is being executed or not may be included in the variation pattern command and output. Then, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode effect is finished may be grasped based on the information and the number of holding balls of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the process of updating counter 203ab during the door breakthrough mode can be omitted on the side of main controller 110, so the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the normal symbol variation processing 2 (S106) in the second embodiment will be described. The normal symbol variation process 2 (S106) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.

  Of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 74) in this second embodiment, in each of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623, the normal symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32) The same processing as each processing of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 is executed.

  Also, in the normal symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current time is in the time saving state of the normal symbol in the processing of S614 (S614: Yes), the variation of the normal symbol The time is set to 30 seconds (S631), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S614 that the current state is in the normal state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S632), and this processing is ended.

  Furthermore, in the normal symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the present is in the normal state of the normal symbol in the processing of S620 (S620: No), the second entering ball The opening time and opening number of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the mouth 640 are set to "one second x 2 times" (S633), and the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S620 that the current time is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the opening time and opening number of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640 It is set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time” (S634), and the process proceeds to S623.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter in the normal state of the normal symbol than in the time-short state of the normal symbol, and the opening time when the normal symbol is hit is It is configured to be long. In addition, as described above, the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment of the present invention is a normal symbol in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol and a high probability state of the normal symbol The configuration is such that the number of determination values to be determined is different only by one. As a result, even in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the hitting probability becomes almost equivalent to the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, so the total time of the ordinary symbol as a total is smaller than the second entrance ball 640 It becomes difficult. Therefore, in the definite variation mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult for the player to hit the ball right after entering the second entry ball opening 640 even if the player strikes the ball right, so the disadvantageous second special symbol It can suppress that the lottery of is executed. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a situation other than the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and it is possible to suppress an excessive disadvantage for the player. In addition, during the big hit that is usually set to the low probability state of the symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640, so it is easy to store the holding balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, start-up processing 2 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. The startup process 2 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, instead of the startup process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

  Of the startup processing 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes of S901 to S910 and S913, S901 to S910 and S913 of the startup process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of is executed. Further, in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, when the process of S 910 ends, the state command setting process for setting the state command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. (S921), the process proceeds to S913. The details of the state command setting process (S921) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The flowchart of FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S921). In this state command setting process (S921), first, the probability variation flag 203g is read (S1801), and a status command is set based on the read status of the probability variation flag 203g (S1802). Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently changing (S1803), and if it is changing (S1803: Yes), the data of the execution area and the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q are read out (S1804) . Next, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S1805), and a fluctuation pattern command is set based on the read values (S1806). Next, a stop type command is set (S1807), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1803 that the special symbol is not changing (S1803: No), each process of S1804 to S1807 is skipped and the present process is ended as it is.

  By executing this state command setting process (see FIG. 76), the game state before the power is shut off, the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect, etc. are voiced in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75). The lamp controller 113 can be notified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described. The jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

  Of the jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, the respective processing of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109 are respectively S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those in steps S1107 to S1109 are executed.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), first, the specific winning hole 650a is opened. The state is set (S1121), the number-of-rounds command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1122), and the process ends. In the second embodiment, a variable winning device 650 is provided instead of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and the normal discharge flow channel 65e1 and the special discharge flow channel 65e2 are not provided therein. Therefore, since it is not necessary to perform the process which switches a flow path in big hit control processing 2 (refer FIG. 77), these processes (S1202, S1203 of FIG. 38) are deleted.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot end timing is in the process of S1109 (S1109: Yes), the jackpot end process in the first embodiment ( In place of the step S1110 in FIG. 37), the jackpot end process 2 is executed (S1123), and this process is ended. Details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1123) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1109 that the end timing of the jackpot is not (S1109: No), winning process 2 is executed instead of the winning process (see S1111 in FIG. 37) in the first embodiment (S1124). ), End this processing. The details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, the process corresponding to the abnormality process (see S1112 in FIG. 37) in the first embodiment is not provided. This is because, in the first embodiment, whether or not to shift to a definite change state after a big hit is determined by whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65 e 3 in the variable winning device 65. This is because, in the two embodiments, there is a difference that the gaming state after the big hit is determined according to the big hit type. For this reason, in the second embodiment, when the ball is left inside the variable winning device 650, it does not affect whether or not it becomes a definite change state, but the fraudulent action of leaving the ball inside It does not hold itself. Therefore, in the second embodiment, an abnormality process (see FIG. 41) for determining whether or not an abnormality in which a ball remains inside the variable winning device 650 has occurred is deleted.

  Also in the second embodiment, processing equivalent to the abnormality processing (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment may of course be executed. Thus, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs inside the variable winning device 650, an error can be notified early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1123) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 (S1123). In the big hit end process 2 (S1123), first, the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S1311), and it is determined whether or not the decremented counter value has become 0.

  If it is determined in the process of S1311 that the counter value after subtraction is 1 or more (S1312: No), this means that the number of consecutive positive change states has not reached the upper limit (limit), so a positive change flag 203 g is set to ON (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1315. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1311 that the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa after subtraction has become 0 (S1313: Yes), this means that the number of consecutive probability variation states has reached the upper limit value. The value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is set to 4 (S1314) without executing the processing of S1313 for turning on the probability variation flag 203g (while leaving the probability variation flag 203g off), and the processing is shifted to S1315. .

  In the processing of S1315 executed after the processing of S1313 or S1314, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is read out (S1315), and the read out value is set to the value of counter 203ab during breakthrough mode. (S1316). Then, the state command is set based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa (S1317). By including the value of the probability variation limit counter 203 aa in the status command, the voice lamp control device 113 recognizes not only the gaming status after a big hit but also the remaining number of times until the number of consecutive probability variation status reaches the upper limit (limit). be able to. When the process of S1317 ends, the large hitting medium flag 203r is set to OFF (S1318), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described. As described above, the winning process 2 (S1124) is a process that is executed instead of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

  Of the winning processing 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, in the processing of S1401 to S1404 and S1406 to S1408, S1401 to S1404 and S1406 of the winning processing (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1408 to S1408 is executed.

  Further, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1404 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or more (S1431). If the value of 203 j is 6 or more (S1431: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1431 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 6 (S1431: No), the process proceeds to S1406.

  Further, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1409 to S1420 of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are deleted. These processes are processes for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3, and for determining whether the ball has passed at a normal timing with the probability change switch 65e3, and the normal discharge flow path 65e1 or special This is because the process is unnecessary for the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in which the discharge flow path 65e2, the probability variation switch 65e3, and the like are not provided. By omitting these processes, the processing load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. First, referring to FIG. 80, start-up processing 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) is a process that is executed instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  Of the startup processing 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, the processing of S4001 to S4013 is the same as the processing of S4001 to S4013 of the startup processing (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. In addition, in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4012 is completed, the state at the time of power on based on the state command and fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 next. Is executed (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4013. The details of the input state determination process (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the closing state determination processing (S4021). In this input state determination process (S4021), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4901), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received and not (S4901: No) Then, a back image is set according to the gaming state at the time of power on (S4902), and this processing ends. Here, the gaming state at the time of power-on is determined based on the data of the gaming state storage area 223h updated in the process of S4012 of the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80). In the case of the normal state, the rear side image for the normal state is set. In addition, since door breakthrough mode production | presentation is presentation performed during a fluctuation | variation of a 2nd special symbol, when power-on is a fluctuation | variation stop state, there is no possibility of door breakthrough mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), then the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S4903 ), It is determined whether the extracted value is 0 (S4904). If the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed. If the breakthrough mode counter 203ab has a value of 1 or more, the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. means.

  In the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode is not 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4904: No), the breakthrough for selecting the presentation mode of the door breakthrough mode effect The mode selection process is executed (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4907. The details of the breakthrough mode selection processing (S4905) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S4904: No), the remaining fluctuation The effect mode according to the time and the lottery result is determined (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. In the process of S4907, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the effect mode determined in the process of S4905 or S4906 (S4907), and this process is ended.

  Next, the details of the breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this breakthrough mode selection processing (S4905).

  In the breakthrough mode selection process (see FIG. 82), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 1 (S5001), and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 If there is (S5001: Yes), it is then determined whether it is a variation pattern of out-of-plane (S5002). If it is determined in the process of S5002 that the variation pattern is out of alignment (S5002: Yes), then it is determined whether the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h is data indicating a probable change state (S5003) If it is a definite change state (S5003: Yes), the power is shut off during execution of the variable display based on the holding ball of the last second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode 1 (see middle left side of FIG. 71), and execution It means that the last holding ball inside was off (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining fluctuation time, it is determined to be the effect mode informing the transition to the probability change mode (S5004), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5003 that the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h is data indicating a low probability state of a special symbol (S5003: No), door breakthrough mode 2 (middle of FIG. 71) It means that the power was cut off during the execution of the variation display based on the last 2nd special symbol holding ball in the right side) and the last holding ball under execution was out (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining fluctuation time, it is determined to be the effect mode informing the transition to the normal mode (S5004), and the present process is ended. By the processing of S5003 and S5004, even if the state when the power is turned on again is during the execution of the last variable display in the door breakthrough mode effect, the door based on the lottery result and the game state The result of the breakthrough mode effect can be notified accurately.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is not 1 (is 2 or more) in the process of S5001 (S5001: No), and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern being executed at the time of power supply restoration is the jackpot fluctuation pattern (S5002: No), first, it is judged whether the present fluctuation pattern is the jackpot E2 (S5006). If it is determined in the process of S5006 that the jackpot E2 is detected (S5006: Yes), it is then determined whether the number of consecutive definite change states has reached the upper limit (S5007). The remaining number up to the upper limit value of the continuous number of definite change states is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the state command together with the gaming state at the time of power on.

  In the process of S5007, when it is determined that the upper limit (limit) of the number of continuous in the definite variation state is reached (S5007: Yes), since the state after the big hit becomes the normal mode, to notify the transition to the normal mode It transfers to the process of S5005 mentioned above. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5007 that the upper limit value (limit) of the continuous number of definite change states has not been reached, the state after the big hit becomes the definite change mode, so the door is succeeded through resurrection production. The effect mode is determined (S5008), and the process ends. As described above, the resurrection production has, as mentioned above, the fact that the number of remaining up to the upper limit (limit) of the number of continuous continuous occurrences of the probability change state has been reduced by having achieved the jackpot E2 although the jackpot E2 It is an effect to show. This rebirth effect makes it possible for the player to recognize that the jackpot E2 has been won during the door breakthrough mode effect.

  If it is determined that the jackpot E2 is not the jackpot E2 in the process of S5006 (S5006: No), it is then determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is the jackpot D2 (S5009). In the process of S5009, when it is determined that the present fluctuation pattern is a big hit D2 (S5009: Yes), it is determined to be a special effect mode indicating that the door breakthrough mode effect has become a big hit (S5010) , End this process.

  In the process of S5009, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the big hit D2 (S5009: No), the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (small hit), and the current fluctuation Since it means that it is not the last change of the door breakthrough mode, an effect mode of breakthrough effect according to the value of the extracted counter 203ab during breakthrough mode is determined (S5011). That is, the mode of the door 814 according to the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is determined. Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set in the breakthrough effect counter 223g, and the flag 223i is set to ON after the closing effect counter 223g (S5012), and this processing is ended. By turning on the flag 223i after the turning on, it is possible to determine that the effect is resumed from the middle of the door breakthrough mode when the power is turned on, even when the fluctuation pattern after the next time is received.

  Similarly to the first embodiment, the door breakthrough mode effect in the second embodiment is also basically 5.8 seconds from the start of the ending period of the big hit to the end of the opening period of the fourth specified winning opening 650a. A series of effects of the effect time of are set. That is, at the start of the door breakthrough mode effect, the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is determined in advance based on the pre-read results of the respective holding balls of the second special symbol. Therefore, basically, while the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed, when the variation pattern command of the second special symbol is newly received, it is only necessary to execute the predetermined effect mode as it is. However, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off during the door breakthrough mode effect, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, and thus the progress status and effect of the door breakthrough mode effect It becomes impossible to grasp etc. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is shut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the power is turned on again, the effect can be grasped by the after-turn flag 223i. Then, while the flag 223i is on after this entry, the door breakthrough mode is performed based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result each time the variation pattern command is received. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the effect, and the effect mode according to the determination result is set. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variable display setting process 2 (S4121) is a process that is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. In the processes of S4801 to S4803 and S4805 to S4809 of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) in the second embodiment, S4801 to S4803 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those in steps S4805 to S4809 are executed.

  Further, in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 83) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4803 ends, the rough change display mode notified by the change pattern command output from the main control device 110 ( Based on the fluctuation time), fluctuation pattern determination processing for determining a detailed rendering aspect of the fluctuation pattern is executed (S4811). The details of the fluctuation pattern determination process (S4811) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S4811 ends, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the detailed presentation mode of the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S4811 (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4805.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the details of the fluctuation pattern determination process (S4811) described above will be described. In the fluctuation pattern determination process (S4811), first, it is determined whether or not the after-loading flag 223i is on (S5101), and if the after-loading flag 223i is off (S5101: No), from the main control device 110 Based on the rough aspect of the fluctuation pattern extracted from the outputted fluctuation pattern command, the detailed rendering aspect of the fluctuation pattern is determined (S5102), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the after-injection flag 223i is on (S5101: Yes), the power is shut off while the door breakthrough mode effect is being performed, and then the power is restarted This means that the process for determining the effect mode during the door breakthrough mode effect according to the information of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the fluctuation pattern command and the lottery result.

  Specifically, first, the value of counter 203ab in breakthrough mode is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S5103), and the value of counter 203ab in breakthrough mode extracted is 1 (that is, the last fluctuation in the door breakthrough mode effect) Is determined (S5104). If it is determined in the process of S5104 that the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), then whether the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is a deviation fluctuation pattern If it is determined (S5105) and it is determined that the variation pattern is out (S5105: Yes), it is determined based on the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h whether the present is a definite variation state of the special symbol (S5106).

  In the process of S5106, when it is determined that the present is a definite variation state of a special symbol (S5106: Yes), an effect mode (see FIG. 10 (b)) for notifying transition to a definite variation mode is determined and processing is performed. It transfers to S5116. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, when it is determined that the current state is a low probability state of special symbol (S5106: No), an effect mode (see FIG. 10A) for notifying transition to the normal mode is determined (S5108), the process proceeds to S5116.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5104 that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 2 or more (S5104: No), and the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab has a value of 1 If it is determined that the variation pattern of the jackpot has been notified (S5105: No), it is then determined whether it is jackpot E2 (S5109).

  If it is determined in the process of S5109 that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit E2 (S5109: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive positive variation states has been reached. (S5110), and if the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times has been reached (S5110: Yes), the state after the end of the jackpot E2 can not be set as the definite change mode, and thus notification of transition to the normal mode The process moves to the process of S5108 for determining the effect mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5110, when it is determined that the number of times of continuous occurrence of definite variation has not reached the upper limit (limit) (S5110: No), the effect mode of the resurrection effect is determined (S5111), and this process is ended. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5109 that the current fluctuation pattern is not the big hit E2 (S5109: No), it is next determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit D2 (S5112), if it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit D2 (S5112: Yes), the special door breakthrough mode effect notification mode to notify the big hit is determined (S5113), and the process proceeds to S5116 And transition.

  Moreover, in the process of S5112, when it is determined that the jackpot D2 is not (S5112: No), the fluctuation pattern of this time is a fluctuation pattern of falling out (small hitting), and the remaining number of fluctuations of the door breakthrough mode effect ( Since it means that the number of holding balls in the second special symbol is 2 or more, the effect mode of the door breakthrough mode effect according to the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode extracted in the process of S5103 is determined (S5114) Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set in the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S5115), and this processing is ended.

  In addition, in the processing of S5116 executed after any of S5107, S5108, S5111, and S5113, the post-loading flag 223i is reset to OFF and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is reset to 0 ( S5116), the process ends.

  By executing this fluctuation pattern determination process, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off during the door breakthrough mode effect, after the power is turned on again, the effect is produced from the middle of the door breakthrough mode effect. Aspects can be reverted. More specifically, if the power is shut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared to grasp the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect, the result of the effect, etc. It will not be possible. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is shut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the power is turned on again, the effect can be grasped by the after-turn flag 223i. Then, while the flag 223i is on after this entry, the door breakthrough mode is performed based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result each time the variation pattern command is received. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the effect, and the effect mode according to the determination result is set. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot is determined in advance for each type of jackpot. In addition, the upper limit (limit) is set to the continuous number of times of the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it reaches the upper limit, the big hit after the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol Configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to form two types of door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1) that is in a definite variation state of special symbol and door breakthrough mode that is in a low probability state of special symbol. it can. Therefore, when it transfers to a door breakthrough mode, even if all the holding balls of a 2nd special symbol remove, it may transfer to a normal mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game characteristic in which it is advantageous or inconvenient to become a big hit in the door breakthrough mode in accordance with the number of consecutive definite change states.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the motorized part 640b is provided for the second entrance 640, and in the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol, the motorized part 640b is difficult to be released. In the normal state (low probability state) of the symbol, the motorized accessory 640b is configured to be easily released. By configuring in this manner, in the probability change mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 even if the player strikes the ball to the right. It is possible to suppress the execution of the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a situation other than the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and it is possible to suppress an excessive disadvantage for the player. In addition, during the big hit that is usually set to the low probability state of the symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640, so it is easy to store the holding balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit .

  Further, in the second embodiment, information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the door breakthrough mode effect in the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 (value of counter 203ab during breakthrough mode) Is included. As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off during the door breakthrough mode effect, the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 after the power is turned on again is used as the voice lamp control device 113. It is possible to easily grasp whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed or not, and the progress in the case where it is being executed, simply by analyzing on the side. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  In the second embodiment, the variation pattern command is configured to include the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode and output, thereby controlling the sound lamp whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is being performed when the power is restored. Although the apparatus 113 is configured to be distinguishable, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern command may include only the information on whether or not the second special symbol after the jackpot ends, which is in the process of being reserved for suspension. That is, it is not necessary to include the information of the number of remaining variable display until the door breakthrough mode effect is finished in the fluctuation pattern. And, when the power is restored during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, based on the number of holding balls of the second special symbol and the type (whether or not hit) of the change pattern notified by the change pattern command It may be determined whether or not it is the final change of the door breakthrough mode effect. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 to audio lamp control device 113.

  In the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command is always output including the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after power on, only the first variation pattern command may be output including the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode. Thereby, the processing load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode is included in the variation pattern command and output, but it is not necessary to be included in the variation pattern command. For example, a command may be separately prepared to notify only the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode. That is, only when the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is changed, the main control unit 110 may notify the sound lamp control unit 113 by a command. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the variation pattern command.

  In the second embodiment, when the power is turned on, the gaming state is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the state command, and the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. The information notified to the control device 113 is not limited to this. For example, the pre-read result of each holding ball may be notified again by a winning information command. By configuring in this way, when the power is turned on during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, not only the fact that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed but also the result of the door breakthrough mode effect When the power is turned on, it can be grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the result of the effect.

Modification of Second Embodiment
Next, modifications of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment described above, the motorized accessory 640 b is attached to the second ball entry port 640. Then, the variation time of the symbol is shorter in the low probability state of the normal symbol than in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the open period of the electrically operated part 640b becomes longer when the normal symbol is hit. By setting it, it was set as the structure which prevents that a ball | bowl enters into the 2nd ball entrance 640 in definite variation mode in which the high probability state of a symbol is normally set (suppression).

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a storage valve 63a capable of storing (stopping) a ball in the upper part of the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 and a sphere stored in the storage valve 63a. When the storage state is released, a general winning opening 63 in which the stored balls can enter is provided. Although the details will be described later, the second entry port 640 in the present modification is basically provided at a position where entry of the ball is impossible (difficult) even if right-handed. As an exception, the ball can enter the second ball entry port 640 only when the player strikes the right in a state where three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a. More specifically, when right-handed while three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, the ball that has flowed down by right-handed collision collides with the third stored ball. The trajectory of the ball is changed, and there is a possibility that the trajectory can enter the second entrance 640. In the present modification, the ball is configured to be able to enter the second ball entrance 640 only during the big hit by canceling the storage state at the normal time and setting the storage state only during the big hit. .

  With this configuration, it is not necessary to attach the motorized accessory 640 b to the second entrance 640. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, the motorized accessory 64 a can be attached to the first ball entrance 64. As a result, as in the first embodiment, by setting the motorized accessory 64a to be easily released in the probability change mode, it is possible to play a game without reducing the number of holding balls. In addition, in the above-described embodiments, "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the "time-short state of the ordinary symbol" are set by making the first ball entry port 64 attach the electric symbol 64a. It is possible to provide a gaming state that was not present. More specifically, a probability variation mode by setting the gaming status when the number of consecutive definite variations reaches the upper limit (limit) to the "special symbol low probability status" and the "normal symbol time saving status". A state where it is possible to execute the lottery of the special symbol while maintaining the holding ball (for example, until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 25 times) after the end of (when the limit is reached) The pullback state can be set. As a result, since it is possible to suppress the player from immediately stopping the game after the probability change mode ends, it is possible to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the description, the "low probability state of special symbol" and the "time saving state of normal symbol" will be referred to as "pull back mode".

  First, with reference to FIG. 85, the game board 13 in the modification of the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, in the present modification, the electric winning combination 64a is attached to the first ball entrance 64, as in the first embodiment. As a result, in the "probability change mode" and the "pull back mode" in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the motorized role piece 64a is easily released, and the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, in this modification, as in the first embodiment, it is configured so as not to be a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  In addition to the second ball entrance 640 and the variable winning device 650, a general winning opening 63 is provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable winning device unit 80. The general winning opening 63 is configured as a winning opening where one winning ball is paid out when the ball enters. Further, a storage valve 63 a is provided vertically above the general winning opening 63. The storage valve 63a can be variably set between a projecting state (see FIG. 86 (a)) projecting to the front side and a buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) in which the game board 13 is buried. It is configured. In the protruding state of the storage valve 63 a, the ball reached to the storage valve 63 a can be prevented from flowing down to the general winning opening 63 by storing (detaining) the ball in the upper part. On the other hand, in the buried state of the storage valve 63a, a ball can pass on the front side of the storage valve 63a. That is, the ball can flow down to the general winning opening 63. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86, in the present modification, the storage valve 63a is set in the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) at normal times other than the large hit, and the storage valve 63a is started at the start of the big hit. Is variably changed from the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)). Then, at the end of the jackpot, the storage valve 63a is changed from the projecting state (see FIG. 86 (a)) to the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) again.

  The protruding state and the buried state of the storage valve 63a will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a view exemplifying the case where the storage valve 63a is in the projecting state, and FIG. 86 (b) is a view exemplifying the case where the storage valve 63a is in the buried state. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the storage valve 63a is in a projecting state along with the start of the jackpot, the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63 is blocked by the storage valve 63a. Thereby, the sphere which reached the flow path concerned is stored above the storage valve 63a for up to three (stop). Since the winning ball can not be obtained unless the ball is won to the specific winning hole 650a during the jackpot, the player almost strikes the right during the jackpot. In the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63, nails, a windmill and the like are arranged such that one of two balls launched by the right strike travels. Therefore, three balls are stored in the information of the storage valve 63a during one round of the big hit (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the ball is further hit to the right while the upper limit number of three balls are being stored above the storage valve 63a, the right hit ball is , And may collide with the third (last) ball stored by the storage valve 63a. As a result of the ball colliding with the stored third ball being reflected in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction so far, in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, It is a track that can enter the second ball entrance 640 provided on the opposite side. In the modification of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a is in the storage state based on the big hit, and the storage state is held until the end of the big hit. Therefore, if the ball is hit in an attempt to cause the ball to enter the specified winning hole 650a during the jackpot, three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a. When three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a and the player performs a right strike to obtain a winning ball, the newly launched ball collides against the stored ball. As a result of changing the flow-down direction, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this way, the player holds the winning ball during the big hit and continues to hit the right, so that the holding ball of the second special symbol is accumulated up to the upper limit number (4) when the big hit is finished Can. Although illustration is omitted, in a state where three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, a part of the balls fired by the right strike do not collide (interference) with the stored balls. Flow down in the direction of the specific winning hole 650a. As a result, it is possible to cause the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 and the specific winning hole 650a during a jackpot.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a view showing a case where the storage valve 63 a is in a buried state. As described above, when the jackpot ends, the projecting state is changed to the buried state, and then the buried state is maintained (held) until the jackpot is reached. When the storage valve 63 a is in the buried state, the ball can pass (flow down) through the flow path provided above the general winning hole 63. Therefore, the ball fired to the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 passes the near side of the buried storage valve 63a and enters the general winning opening 63, or A flow path is provided which is provided between the winning opening 63 and the second ball entrance 640 and is directed to the specific winning opening 650a. In this modification, the storage valve 63a is buried until the next big hit after the big hit is completed, so that the ball hit at the right time usually enters the second ball entry port 640. It can be prevented. As a result, since it is possible to suppress that the lottery of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous at the normal time is executed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the disadvantage for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a state transition method in this modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modification, in addition to the four states (normal mode, positive change mode, door breakthrough mode 1, door breakthrough mode 2) provided in the above-described second embodiment, the pullback mode is It is provided.

  In the pullback mode, a low probability state of the special symbol and a short time state of the normal symbol are set. In the present modification, when the upper limit (limit) of the number of continuous changes in the probability change state is reached, the state after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol. For this reason, in this modification, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is a low probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol becomes, and the holding ball of the second special symbol becomes 0 in the door breakthrough mode 2, the pullback mode is set. .

  As shown in the upper right of FIG. 87, the pullback mode shifts to another mode when the lottery of special symbols for the short time (25 times) set to become a jackpot or not to be a jackpot is completed. there's a possibility that. Specifically, when all the lottery of special symbols for the number of time reductions are out, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. Moreover, since the low probability state of the special symbol is set in the pullback mode and the number of consecutive definite change states is reset, the door breakthrough mode 1 is entered when the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery .

  In this modification, in the time-shortened state of the normal symbol, the motorized accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is easily released. Accordingly, since the open control of the motorized accessory 64a is the same in both the positive change mode and the pullback mode, it is difficult to determine from the appearance whether it is the positive change mode or the pullback mode. In this modified example, when the time saving count ends and the pullback mode falls to the normal mode, the player can recognize that the pullback mode has been performed. In other words, when the jackpot in the drawing of the first special symbol in the pullback mode is a big hit, it becomes difficult to know whether it has become a big hit in the definite change mode or a jackpot in the pullback mode. Therefore, by becoming a big hit in the pullback mode, it is possible to make the player think as if the definite variation state continues beyond the upper limit of the number of consecutive definite variation states. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, with this modification, all the holding balls of the second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode 2 have become out of place in this modification because the definite variation mode and the pullback mode can not be distinguished from the operation etc. of the motorized combination 64a. Even in the case, an effect to execute the breakthrough of the door is executed. As a result, if the adventurer 811 executes an operation in which all the doors are successfully broken in the door breakthrough mode, whether the door breakthrough mode 1 is shifted to the positive change mode or the door breakthrough mode 2 is pulled back to the withdrawal mode. It is possible to make it difficult to understand if it has shifted. Therefore, it is possible to realize the novel game characteristic which does not know how long the repetition of the jackpot and the mode (the probability change mode or the pullback mode) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set is continued.

  As described above, in the modification of the second embodiment, the ball is configured to be able to be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 63a, and the ball is thrown right according to whether the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 63a. It is possible to switch the direction in which the water flows down. And when a ball is not stored by storage valve 63a, while it becomes difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance port 640, the upper limit number of balls (three) is stored by storage valve 63a. If it is, the flow direction of a part of the newly launched balls is switched by the stored balls, and it is configured to be changed to a trajectory that can enter the second entrance 640. did. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 even when the storage valve 63a is set in the buried state, even when right-handed. In addition, during a big hit where the storage valve 63a is set in the projecting state, the ball can be configured to be able to enter the second ball entry port 640 when the right strike is performed. Therefore, it is possible to store the holding balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit at the end of the jackpot, and it is possible to suppress that the lottery of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player is executed normally.

  Further, in the modification of the second embodiment, when the number of consecutive definite variation states becomes the upper limit, the time saving state of the normal symbol which is continued until the lottery of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (25 times) is set. Configuration. By configuring in this manner, when the number of consecutive definite variations reaches the upper limit, the lottery of the special symbol is performed without decreasing the holding balls until the lottery of the special symbol of the predetermined number of times (25 times) is executed. It is possible to form a state (pullback mode) in which it can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from immediately quitting the game even when the number of consecutive definite change states reaches the upper limit and the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Further, since the time reduction state of the symbol is normally set in both the pullback mode and the positive variation mode, it is configured that it is difficult to distinguish between them from the appearance etc. of the operation of the motorized accessory 64a. As a result, even when the jackpot in the pullback mode is achieved, it is possible to make the player think as if the jackpot in the probability change mode is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game characteristic that can make it feel as if the definite change state continues beyond the upper limit of the definite change state.

  In the modification of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a is provided above the general winning opening 63, and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 depending on the state of the storage valve 63a. Although the present invention is configured to switch between a state in which the ball can enter the ball, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the general winning opening 63, a storage valve 63a may be provided above the second ball entry port 640. Then, while the large hitting is configured to be able to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640 while the storage valve 63a is set in the buried state, it is possible to store the ball in the second ball entry port 640 By making the valve 63 a in a projecting state, the ball may be difficult to enter the second ball inlet 640. As a result, since the general winning opening 63 can be omitted, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the modified example of the second embodiment, the upper limit is set to the number of consecutive definite change states, but instead, an upper limit may be set to the number of drawing special symbols in one definite change state. That is, when the jackpot happens, the jackpot may continue, for example, until the lottery of the special symbol is performed 130 times until the lottery of the special symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive definite changes has been reached, so that the processing load at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. Also, in this case, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is set, the definite variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol are set, but if the jackpot of the second special symbol is set, It is also possible that the winning balls can not be obtained with a high probability (for example, a percentage of 95%), and the jackpot type for transitioning to a special symbol definite variation state and a normal symbol normal state after big hit may be determined. . By configuring in this way, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a novel game characteristic is realized that allows the player to play a game in the hope that it will not be a big hit in the lottery based on the holding ball of the second special symbol stored in the big hit. be able to.

Third Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 103, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the second ball entry port 640 and the specific winning hole 65 a are provided in the flow path on the right side in the front view of the gaming board 13. The flow path on the right side in the front view may receive only the ball that has hit the right (the ball does not flow into the flow path on the right side in the front view even if you hit the left). In both the mouth 640 and the specific winning hole 65a, the ball can enter the ball (if the ball can be easily entered) if the player strikes right, and the ball can not enter the ball (if the ball can not enter) if the player strikes the left. Therefore, if you hit the ball right to get the winning ball when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, the ball will also enter the second ball entry port 640, so after the big hit the second special The holding ball of the design can be made to be in the state accumulated to the upper limit. As a result, after the jackpot of the first special symbol, the state where the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous when the jackpot is hit, is continuously executed is formed.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the left hitting enables the ball to enter the ball (entering easy) and the right hitting causes the ball to not enter the ball (hard entering). Two specific winnings, 656a, and the right specific winning opening 657a, where the ball can enter the ball (entering easy) if you hit the right and can not enter the ball if you hit the left (the ball can not enter the ball). The mouth was provided. Then, as the type of jackpot of the first special symbol, only the left specified winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds (the right specified winning opening 657a is hard to be opened) and the left specified winning opening 656a in the first round. Is opened, and the right specified winning opening 657a is opened in the other rounds (the right specified winning opening 657a is easily opened) and a jackpot type is provided. That is, there are few opportunities to hit the right during the jackpot (the holding ball of the second special symbol is hard to be stored in the jackpot), and the chance to hit the right is large (the hold ball for the second special symbol wins the jackpot) It is configured to provide a jackpot type that is easy to store. If you have a big hit type with few chances to hit the right (it's hard to store the second special symbol's holding ball in the big hit), it's less likely that the big hit will be included in the holding ball that exists at the end of the big hit. The possibility of transition to the definite variation mode can be made higher. On the other hand, if it becomes a jackpot type with many opportunities to perform a right strike (the holding ball of the second special symbol is easily stored in the jackpot), the possibility that the jackpot will be included in the holding balls existing at the jackpot end time is also high. Therefore, the possibility of transition to the probability change mode is relatively low. This makes it possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the type of the jackpot, and therefore, when the jackpot is achieved, the type can be focused more. Thus, the player's expectation can be further enhanced until the jackpot type is identified.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the fluctuation display is further displayed by increasing the difference in the degree of advantage according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol. It was configured to suggest the jackpot type by the type of. More specifically, the number of rounds is small (2 rounds or 5 rounds), and the right specified winning opening 657a is opened other than the first round (the holding balls of the second special symbol are easily stored). In the case of the disadvantageous jackpot type), it is informed that the main symbol imitating the same number of even numbers is aligned on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and that the jackpot has been achieved. In addition, the number of rounds is large (16 rounds), and the right specified winning opening 657a is opened in other than the first round (the holding balls of the second special symbol are easily stored), becoming a jackpot type (relatively disadvantageous jackpot type) In the case, among the numbers “1 to 9”, notification is made that three main symbols imitating any of eight types of numbers other than “7” are aligned on the display screen. Furthermore, in the case of the most advantageous jackpot type (a round number is 16 rounds and a jackpot type for digesting all rounds with left strikes), any one of the third symbols imitating the numbers “1 to 9” There is a possibility that That is, when three main symbols with an odd number other than "7" are aligned, it indicates that it is a jackpot of at least 16 rounds, and further, when the main symbols with "7" are aligned. Means that it is a jackpot type which can acquire a prize ball by performing left strike in all rounds of the jackpot in addition to the number of rounds being 16 rounds. As a result, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game paying attention to the types of main symbols aligned on the display screen at the end of the variable display, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, the most advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds, a jackpot type that digests all rounds on the left) is selected, and the numbers other than “7” are uniform in the variable display effect In the case where a jackpot has been made, a promotion effect to be performed during the jackpot is subsequently changed (promoted) into a “7” arrangement. That is, in the most advantageous jackpot, the variable display effect or the jackpot after the variable display effect is notified of “7” assortment indicating that it is the most advantageous jackpot. Similarly, the number of rounds is the largest (16 rounds), and the right specified winning opening 657a is opened other than the first round (the holding ball of the second special symbol is easy to be stored) If the numbers are the same, then the promotion effect executed during the jackpot is executed (promoted) to be changed (promoted) to an odd number arrangement other than “7” by the promotion effect executed. That is, in the 16 round jackpot where the right specified winning opening 657a is opened other than the first round, the odd number alignment other than "7" is notified during the variable display effect or the jackpot after the variable display effect. Furthermore, in addition to the right specific winning opening 657a being opened other than the first round, the number of rounds is small (5 rounds or 2 rounds), and even numbers are aligned by the variable display effect and developed into a promotion effect Even in the case, the even numbers will remain uniform without being changed (promoted) to odd numbers. In this way, by providing the promotion effect, the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot type having a low degree of advantage in the variable display effect (the even number corresponding to the jackpot of 5 rounds or 2 rounds is simulated Even if the displayed third symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the combination corresponding to the jackpot type having a high degree of advantage by the promotion effect (corresponding to the most advantageous jackpot, of the third symbol of “7”) The player can be expected to be changed (promoted) to a combination etc.). This makes it possible to improve the interest.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 , And the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially modified, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 The point is that the process is partially changed. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 88, in the gaming board 13 in the third embodiment, the left variable winning device 656 is installed in the left channel of the gaming board 13 instead of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment being deleted. While providing, the right variable winning device 657 is provided in the flow path on the right side. The internal structure of the left variable winning device 656 provided in the left channel of the game board 13 is the same as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment. That is, the ball entering the left specified winning opening 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is distributed to either the normal discharge flow path 65e1 or the special discharge flow path 65e2 inside the left variable winning device 656. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2 during the jackpot and the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, a probability change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, the right variable winning device 657 has only a function of paying out eleven winning balls when detecting the entry of the ball into the right specified winning opening 657a. That is, it is a prize winning device having a simple configuration in which the switch (probability variation switch 65 e 3) which is the target of determination as to whether or not to assign the probability variation state is not provided inside.

  When the left specified winning opening 656a of the left variable winning device 656 becomes the jackpot of the first special symbol, the first round (in the case of jack A3 to C3 described later) or all rounds (in the case of jackpot D3 described later) Opened with). On the other hand, the right specified winning combination 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened after the second round when the jackpots A3 to C3 are reached. When the left specified winning opening 656a becomes a jackpot type (jackpot D3) to be opened in all rounds, it is possible to obtain a winning ball simply by continuing to hit the left during the jackpot. That is, since it is not necessary to hit the ball with the possibility that the ball may enter the second entrance 640, after the end of the big hit, it is disadvantageous in the second special symbol lottery (ie, a definite change state is given) It is difficult (not likely) to become a big hit. In other words, in the lottery performed after the jackpot based on the holding balls present at the end of the jackpot, there is no possibility (low) to become the jackpot again. Therefore, when the left specified winning opening 656a becomes a big hit type (big hit D3) to be opened in all rounds, it is possible to make the player have a greater sense of satisfaction. Hereinafter, a jackpot type capable of digesting a jackpot by performing a left hit in all rounds is referred to as a "left hit jackpot". On the other hand, the type of jackpot that digests the jackpot by right hitting in the second and subsequent rounds is called "right hitting jackpot".

  On the other hand, if the right specific winning opening 657a of the right variable winning device 657 becomes a jackpot type to be opened after the second round, the winning ball can not be won unless the right hitting is done after the second round (Become difficult), a large number of balls enter the second entrance 640 during the jackpot. Therefore, the holding ball of the second special symbol can be accumulated up to the upper limit at the end of the jackpot. If the number of holding balls in the second special symbol is large at the end of the jackpot, the possibility of becoming a jackpot after the jackpot in the lottery based on the holding ball becomes higher than the left hitting jackpot. For this reason, after the end of the jackpot, since it is possible to form a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous when the jackpot is hit is continuously executed, as in the first embodiment, for the player, It is possible to provide novel playability that can be played in the hope that all the holding balls of the second special symbol stored in the jackpot will come off (small hit).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, a promotion effect which is a type of display effect in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, as described above, the main symbol attached with the number “7” may be aligned only during the variable display notifying the left hitting jackpot. In addition, there is a possibility that the main symbols attached with odd numbers other than "7" may be aligned during the variable display notifying the 16 round jackpot. In other words, even in the case of the variable display for notifying the left hitting jackpot or the variable display for notifying the 16 round jackpot, there is a possibility that the main symbols with even numbers are aligned. In the third embodiment, when the main symbols with even numbers are aligned in the variable display for notifying the 16 round big hit or the left hitting big hit, the opening period of the big hit after the 1st round is over Over the interval period, the main symbol once aligned in the variable display is changed (promoted) to a main symbol that simulates the number "7", or a main symbol that mimics an odd number other than "7" To be executed. As a result, even when the main symbols imitating the even numbers are aligned in the variable display, it is possible to expect the promotion effect to be executed during the big hit and to be promoted to the symbols imitating the odd numbers. Therefore, even when the even-numbered symbols are aligned in the variable display, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. Further, the promotion effect is configured such that the rate at which the promotion is successfully performed is higher than the case where the promotion fails. As a result, when the promotion effect is performed, the player's expectation for promotion can be improved.

  FIG. 89A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the opening period of the jackpot where the promotion effect is set. As shown in FIG. 89 (a), in the opening period of the jackpot where the promotion effect is set, the third symbol aligned in the variable display (in the example of FIG. 89 (a), the main symbol imitating "2") Continues to be displayed. Further, in the upper center of the display screen, there is formed a display area HR5 in which the characters “promotion chance !! hit me on the left !!” are displayed. In addition, on the left side of the display area HR5, a display area HR1 in which the character "left-handed" and the image of the arrow pointing left is displayed is displayed. Further, a cannon 815 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen. By these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the effect using the cannon 815 is executed by left hitting.

  The reason for reporting left hit in the opening period is that the left specified winning opening 656a is opened in the first round. By starting left hitting during the opening period, it is possible to efficiently win the ball to the left specified winning opening 656a at the start of the first round.

  FIG. 89 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the first round. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), during one round, when a ball winning (entering ball) to the left specified winning opening 656a is detected, the third symbol (main symbol imitating "2") is displayed by the cannon 815. A bombardment effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), in the third pattern, the part bombarded is in a state in which the view is blocked by the smoke K1. Also after that, each time the left specified winning opening 656a is detected, an effect (the shelling effect) in which the third symbol is bombarded is executed, and the smoke increases.

  FIG. 90 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of one round in the jackpot where the promotion effect is set. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), at the end of one round, smoke K1 to K7 are displayed so as to cover all of the third symbol. By concealing all the third symbol, it is possible to allow the player to predict whether the third symbol appearing after the smoke is clear remains even or odd. The expectation for the promotion of can be improved.

  FIG. 90 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the interval period after the end of one round when promotion to the left hitting jackpot is successful (that is, the present jackpot type is the left hitting jackpot) . As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the promotion to the left hitting jackpot is successful, after the smoke K1 to K7 clears, the effect that the three main designs imitating the number of "7" appear is executed Be done. In addition, in the display area HR5, the characters “promotion to super big bonus !!” are displayed. These display contents can make it easy for the player to understand that the player has made a left-handed jackpot. Thus, the player can be greatly satisfied.

  In addition, when promoting to a symbol (a main symbol imitating an odd number other than “7”) indicating a right hit jackpot of 16 rounds, the character “promotion to big bonus !!” is displayed on the display area HR5. Is displayed. Also, if promotion fails (that is, if the type of jackpot this time was a right hit jackpot other than 16 rounds), even after the smoke K1 to K7 is clear, the main symbol changes as the symbol imitating an even number While the effect not being executed is executed, the characters "promotion failure ..." are displayed in the display area HR5. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand the jackpot type as to whether or not the promotion is successful, and if the promotion is successful. Therefore, an effect that is easy to understand can be provided.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the left variable winning device 656 is configured to have the probability change switch 65e3 and the left variable winning device 656 is also provided with the left variable winning device 656. The specific winning hole 656a is configured to be opened in the first round of the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to make the opening operation the same until the end of the one round interval period of the jackpot, even in the case of the left hitting jackpot or the right hitting jackpot. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the left specified winning opening 656a or the right specified winning opening 657a, it can be difficult to distinguish whether it is a left hitting jackpot or a right hitting jackpot. Therefore, when the promotion effect is executed, since the game can be played by paying attention to the contents of the effect, the effect of the promotion effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect is performed in the first round in which the left variable winning device 656 provided with the probability variation switch 65e3 operates. Thereby, when the promotion effect is executed, it pays attention to whether or not the ball is promoted (entered) to the left specified winning hole 656a, and it is promoted even if it is decided that it will be a definite change state after a big hit. The remaining games in the first round can be played.

  Here, in a general gaming machine, a game with a big hit is performed by paying the most attention to whether or not to be a definite change state. That is, it is general to play a game in a big hit paying the most attention to whether or not the ball wins to the winning opening in which the probability change switch is built. However, when the ball passes through the probability change switch and it is determined that a probability change state is established, the player is satisfied at that time, and the remaining game in the jackpot is merely a task to obtain the prize ball. There was a case that became.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be performed over the period from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, the promotion effect is continued even after passing through the probability change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after the sphere passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 and it is determined that the probability variation state is established, the result of the promotion effect can be noticed, so the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3. Even after that, you can make it pay attention to the effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming the work for simply obtaining the prize ball, so it is possible to improve the interest for the game during the jackpot.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. First, the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a).

  FIG. 91A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91A, in the ROM 202 of the third embodiment, an open scenario selection table 202e is added to the configuration (see FIG. 13A) of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above. They differ in that they Further, the configuration is different in that the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the third embodiment, four types of jackpots A3 to D3 are provided as jackpots of the first special symbol. Moreover, four types of jackpots E3 to H3 are provided as jackpot types of the second special symbol. The jackpots A3 to C3 and E3 are jackpots corresponding to the jackpots A to D in the first embodiment, and the number of rounds is 16 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds, and 16 rounds, respectively. That is, the jackpot is a jackpot in which the right specified winning combination port 657a is opened in a round other than the first round of the jackpot. In the case of a right-handed jackpot, the right specified winning opening 657a is opened from the second round, so it is impossible to win a ball for the right specified winning opening 657a if a right hit is not made after the second round. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, by continuing right hitting during the big hit, a large amount of balls enter the second ball entry port 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13, and the end of the big hit Sometimes it can be in a state where the holding ball of the disadvantageous second special symbol is accumulated up to the upper limit. Therefore, after the end of the jackpots A3 to C3 and E3, it is possible to shift to the door breakthrough mode in the same manner as after the end of the jackpots A to D in the first embodiment. Thereby, after the end of the jackpots A3 to D3 and E3, it is possible to provide a novel play characteristic that the game is played in hopes that it will not be a jackpot in the drawing of the special symbol based on the holding ball of the second special symbol. it can.

  On the other hand, the jackpot D3, H3 is a left hit jackpot with 16 rounds, and the left specified winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds. If you hit a left-handed jackpot, you can get a winning ball just by continuing to hit the left during the jackpot. That is, since it is not necessary to hit the ball with the possibility that the ball may enter the second entrance 640, after the end of the big hit, it is disadvantageous in the second special symbol lottery (ie, a definite change state is given) Difficulty) There is no possibility of becoming a big hit (transition directly to the positive variation mode without going through the door breakthrough mode). Therefore, when the left specified winning opening 656a becomes a big hit type (big hit D3, H3) opened in all rounds, it is possible to make the player have a greater sense of satisfaction.

  The jackpot F3, G3 is a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot E, F in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot type in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. That is, in each round of the jackpot, the right specific winning opening 657a is a jackpot type opened only for 0.2 seconds. Since the right variable winning device 657 is not provided with the probability changing switch 65e3, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from passing through the probability changing switch 65e3 when the big hits F3 and G3 occur. Therefore, it is possible to make the second special symbol lottery more disadvantageous. Since the right specified winning opening 657a is opened in each round when the big hit F3 or G3 occurs, in the third embodiment, the right specified winning hole 657a is also small when it becomes a small hit. It is supposed to be open. Thereby, when the right specified winning combination 657a is opened, it is difficult to distinguish whether the opening is due to the big hit F3, G3 or the small hit. it can. Therefore, it can be difficult to identify whether the jackpot of the second special symbol has come from the operation of the right specific winning opening 657a, so as in the first embodiment, let us pay attention to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect I can play a game.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), for the first special symbol, the “big hit A3” of which the number of rounds is 16 is associated with the range where the value of the first type counter C2 is “0 to 4”. 91b (see 202b1 in FIG. 91 (b)), and in the range of “5 to 84”, “big hit B3” of 5 rounds is associated and specified (see 202b2 in FIG. 91 (b)). In the range of “85 to 94”, “big hit C3” of 2 rounds is defined in association with the number of rounds (refer to 202 b 3 in FIG. 91 (b)), and the range of “95 to 99” is round The “big hit D3” of 16 rounds is defined in association with the number (see 202 b 4 in FIG. 91 (b)). Since the possible values for the first hit type counter C2 are 100 of “0 to 99”, the percentage at which “big hit A3” is determined when the first special symbol is a big hit is 5% (5/5 100). Similarly, the percentage at which "big hit B3" is determined is 80% (80/100), the percentage at which "big hit C3" is determined is 10% (10/100), and "big hit D3" is determined. Rate is 5% (5/100). That is, in the first special symbol lottery, the ratio of the right hitting jackpot (big hit A3 to C3) is 95%, and the ratio of the left hitting jackpot (big hit D3) is 5%. The ratio of the left hitting jackpot is extremely low to the right hitting jackpot, so that it is possible to make the player feel more satisfied when an advantageous left hitting jackpot is notified.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), for the second special symbol, the value of the first type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 3”, “big hit E3” with 16 rounds. The jackpot is specified in association (see 202b5 in FIG. 91B), and in the range of “4 to 48”, “big hit F3” in the number of rounds is specified in association with (FIG. 91B) In the range of “49 to 98” (see 202b6), “big hit G3” with six rounds is defined in association with it (see 202b7 in FIG. 91 (b)), and the number of rounds is “99”. The “round jack H3” of 16 rounds is defined in association with each other (see 202 b 8 in FIG. 91 (b)). Therefore, the percentage at which "big hit E3" is determined when the jackpot of the second special symbol is 4% (4/100), the percentage at which "big hit F3" is determined is 45% (45/100) The rate at which the "big hit G3" is determined is 50% (50/100), and the rate at which the "big hit H3" is determined is 1% (1/100). That is, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the percentage of determining the big hit (one of the big hit F3, G3) to which the probability change state is hard to be given is 95%. Therefore, if it becomes a big hit of the second special symbol during the door breakthrough mode, it shifts to the normal mode at a very high rate (95%). In addition, the percentage of jackpots that the left specified winning opening 656a is opened (given a probability change state after jackpot) is 5%, of which 4% is a right hit jackpot (big hit E3) and 1% is a left hit jackpot ( It becomes jackpot H3). Therefore, if the player wins a left win in the second special symbol drawing, the player can be made to think that he was very lucky, and thus the player can feel greater joy. .

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect may be executed even when the jackpots E3 and H3 occur. Since jackpots E3 and H3 are both 16 round jackpots, jackpots E3 and H3 are obtained, and when promotion effects are executed, effects are produced in which main symbols imitating odd numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display After that, in the promotion production, production of whether to promote to the main symbol imitating "7" is executed. Although the jackpot H3 is a rare jackpot type that is selected only at 1% rate in the jackpot of the second special symbol, the possibility of jackpot F3, G3 occupying the percentage of 95% is excluded at the stage when the jackpot was informed Be done. That is, when the jackpot is notified in the second special symbol lottery, it is determined that the distribution is a 4% jackpot E3 or the distribution is a 1% jackpot H3. Therefore, since the jackpot H3 is obtained at a ratio of 1⁄5, the player can be made to recognize that it is a chance to be the most advantageous jackpot. Furthermore, as described above, since the promotion effect is set so that the percentage of successful promotion cases is higher, a jackpot is notified in the second special symbol lottery, and the promotion effect is developed. In this case, the player's expectation for the jackpot H3 can be further enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the details of the open scenario selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a). The open scenario selection table 202e is, for each jackpot type, a type of a specific winning opening to be opened in each round of the jackpot (any of the left specified winning opening 656a and the right specified winning opening 657a), and an opening period It is a data table that defines a long open for a maximum of 30 seconds, or a short open for a maximum of 0.2 seconds. When the jackpot is won, an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type selected this time is read out from the open scenario selection table 202e and stored in an open scenario storage area 203ba described later. Then, during the jackpot, the opening operation of each round is set in accordance with the scenario defined in the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), the left specified prize for the first round as an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot types “jacker A3” to “jacker C3” and “jacker E3” (ie, right hit jackpot) A long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the mouth 656a is defined in association with each other, and a long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the right specified winning opening 657a is defined in association with each round after the second round (see FIG. See 202e in 92 (a)). As a result, when the jackpot wins, the left specified winning opening 656a is opened only in the first round, and the right specified winning opening 657a is opened in each round after the second round. Therefore, the second ball entry port provided on the right side of the game board 13 can not be obtained unless a game with a big hit is made by aiming at the right specific winning hole 657a by right hitting after the second round. A lot of balls enter the big hole into 640. Therefore, since the holding ball of the second special symbol can be in the upper limit value at the end of the right hitting jackpot, the lottery of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous after the end of the big hit is continuously executed. Mode can be set. Therefore, it is possible to realize the novel game characteristic that the player is allowed to play the game in anticipation of continuing to lose the second special symbol lottery continuously after the end of the jackpot.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the length of the left specified winning opening 656a for all rounds as an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type "jackt D3" and "jackt H3" (ie, left hit jackpot) The release (maximum 30 seconds) is defined in association (see 202 e 2 in FIG. 92A). Thus, in the left hitting jackpot, it is possible to obtain a large number of winning balls simply by aiming at the left specified winning hole 656a and hitting the left in all rounds. That is, since it is not necessary to hit the right during the big hit, there is no possibility that the ball will enter the second entrance 640 during the big hit. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, in many cases, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous at the end of the jackpot will be zero, and directly after the jackpot the most advantageous directly through the door breakthrough mode. It is possible to shift to "probability mode". This makes it possible for the player to have a greater sense of satisfaction in the case of a left-handed jackpot.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), as a release scenario corresponding to the jackpot type "jacker F3" and "jacker G3", the short specified opening of the right specified winning opening 657a for all rounds (maximum 0.2 seconds ) Are defined in association with each other (see 202e3 in FIG. 92 (a)). As a result, when it becomes "big hit F3", and "big hit G3", it is almost impossible to obtain a winning ball, and the ball is allowed to enter the left specified winning hole 656a and the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 There is no possibility to do it. In other words, it is possible to form a disadvantageous jackpot that neither gets a winning ball nor is it given a probability change state after a jackpot.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, by setting the opening operation in accordance with the opening scenario defined in the opening scenario selection table 202e, the same opening operation is accurately set every time in all the jackpot types Can.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). FIG. 92 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), the RAM 203 in the third embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that an open scenario storage area 203ba is added. ing. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The open scenario storage area 203 ba is a storage area for storing (storing) the open scenario when the open scenario corresponding to the current big hit type is read from the open scenario selection table 202 e by winning the big hit. It is. At the start of each round in the jackpot, according to the open scenario stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba and the number of rounds of the new round, the type of specific winning opening to open (left specific winning opening 656a, right specific winning prize A mouth 657a) and an open period (either long open for up to 30 seconds or short open up to 0.2 seconds) are determined.

  Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 93A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), in the ROM 222 of the third embodiment, a promotion effect lottery table 222b is added to the configuration (see FIG. 20 (a)) of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment described above. They differ in that they The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Details of the promotion effect lottery table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). The promotion effect lottery table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect (lottery), and for each jackpot type, a random number value determined to execute the promotion effect (the effect lottery counter 223j The range of values is defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), "0 to 49" are defined in association with "big hit A3" as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j (FIG. 93). See 222b1 of (b)). Although described in detail later, the effect lottery counter 223 j is configured as a random number counter whose value is generated in the range of “0 to 99”, and can take 100 values of “0 to 99”. Therefore, the rate at which the promotion effect is determined when the jackpot is A3 is 50% (50/100). When it becomes "big hit A3" (16 rounds right hit big hit) and the promotion effect is determined, the effect is executed that three main symbols (the third symbol) imitating the same number of even numbers in the variable display are aligned After that, the promotion to be promoted to a jackpot is promoted to a main symbol imitating the same odd number other than "7", and it is informed that the game is a 16 round right-handed jackpot. On the other hand, when the promotion effect is not determined, the effect is executed in which the main symbols imitating odd numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display effect. In this case, the promotion effect is not performed during the jackpot, and the normal jackpot effect (see FIG. 8) is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), "0 to 19" are associated with "big hit B3", "big hit C3", and "big hit E3" as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j. (See 222b2 in FIG. 93 (b)). Among the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223 j, 20 counter values (random number values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion effect are defined, so “big hit B3”, “big hit C3” The rate at which the promotion effect is determined in the case where the jackpot is any of “Hit jackpot E3” is 20% (20/100). If the jackpot is determined to be "big hit B3" (five rounds right hit big jack) or "big hit C3" (two rounds right hit big jack) in the lottery of the first special symbol, even if the variation display is even After the effect in which three main symbols imitating the same number are aligned is performed, the effect of failing to promote in the promotion effect in the jackpot is performed. In addition, when the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect in which the main symbols imitating the even numbers are aligned in the variable display effect is executed, the normal jackpot effect (see FIG. 8) without developing into the promotion effect. Is executed.

  In addition, when it becomes "big hit E3" (right hit big hit of 16 rounds) in the lottery of the second special symbol and the promotion effect is decided, the main imitating the same odd number except "7" in the variable display After the effect in which three symbols are aligned is performed, the effect of failing to be promoted in the promotion effect performed during the jackpot is performed. In addition, when the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect that the main symbols imitating the same odd number other than "7" are aligned in the variable display is executed, the normal jackpot does not develop into the promotion effect An effect (see FIG. 8) is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), for "big hit D3" and "big hit H3" (16 round left hit big hit), "0 to 79" as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j. Are defined in association with each other (see 222b3 in FIG. 93 (b)). Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223 j, 80 counter values (random number values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion effect are defined, so “big hit D3” or “big hit H3 The rate at which the promotion effect is determined is 80% (80/100). When the promotion effect is determined by becoming a "big hit D3" in the first special symbol lottery, and after the effect that three main symbols imitating the same number of even numbers are aligned in the variable display is executed, promotion in the jackpot An effect of promoting to a main symbol imitating a number of "7" is performed in the effect, and it is informed that the game is a 16 round left hit jackpot. In addition, when it becomes “big hit H3” in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the promotion effect is decided, the effect that three main symbols imitating the same number of odd numbers other than “7” in the fluctuation display are executed After being done, the promotion to be promoted to the main symbol imitating the number of "7" is executed by the promotion effect at the jackpot, and it is informed that it is the left hit jackpot of 16 rounds. In addition, when the promotion effect is not determined, the effect is executed in which the main symbols imitating the number “7” are aligned in the variable display effect. In this case, the promotion effect is not performed during the jackpot, and the normal jackpot effect is performed.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 93 (c). As shown in FIG. 93C, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment is promoted to the effect lottery counter 223j and the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20B). This is different in that the in-progress flag 223 k is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The effect lottery counter 223 j is a counter used for a lottery of the effect mode, such as determination of whether or not to execute the promotion effect (lottery). This effect lottery counter 223j. The value is updated in the range of "0 to 99". When drawing a promotion effect, it is determined whether any of the random number values (counter values) specified in the promotion effect drawing table 222b matches the value of the effect drawing counter 223j, and if the values match, the promotion effect The execution of is decided.

  The promotion effect in progress flag 223 k is a flag indicating whether or not a promotion effect is set. If the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is on, it indicates that the promotion effect is set, and if off, it indicates that the promotion effect is not set. The promotion effect in progress flag 223k is set to ON if the winning selection of the promotion effect to be executed at the start of the change of the third symbol is won when the jackpots A to E or G are selected in the special symbol lottery. (See S5405 in FIG. 103). Also, after setting the end of the promotion effect, it is set to OFF (see S4515 in FIG. 101).

<About control processing of main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. First, the details of the special symbol variation process 3 (S121) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special symbol variation process 3 (S121) is a process that is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

  Among the special symbol variation processing 3 (refer to FIG. 94) in this third embodiment, in each of the processing of S201 to S221, each processing of S201 to S221 in the special symbol variation processing (refer to FIG. 28) in the first embodiment The same process is performed.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 94) in the third embodiment, when the process of S219 is finished, the release scenario selection table 202e is then opened to select the release scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type. The scenario selection process (S241) is executed, and the process proceeds to S220. Details of the open scenario selection process (S241) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the above-described open scenario selection process (S241). In the open scenario selection process (S241), first, the open scenario selection table 202e (see FIG. 92A) is read (S1901), and an open scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified (S1902). Then, the identified open scenario is stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba (S1903), and the process ends.

  By the open scenario specified in the open scenario selection process (see FIG. 95) and stored in open scenario storage area 203ba, the open operation of each round in the big hit can be set to an appropriate action according to the big hit type .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) will be described. The jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is a process that is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening operation during the jackpot.

  Of the jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, in each of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1112, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those in steps S1107 to S1112 are executed. In the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the start timing of a new round is in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment Instead of (see FIG. 38), the jackpot operation setting process 3 is executed (S1131), and the process ends. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131). The jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Of the jackpot control process 3 (S1131) in the third embodiment, the processes of S1202 to S1204 are the same as the processes of S1202 to S1204 in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Is executed.

  Further, when the jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 97) in the third embodiment is executed, first, the data of the release scenario stored in the release scenario storage area 203ba is read (S1211), and the read data Based on the type of the specific winning opening to be opened in the current round (the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a), and the opening time is specified (S1212). Next, while setting the opening of the specified winning combination (the left specified winning opening 656a or the right specified winning opening 657a) of the type specified in the process of S1212 (S1213), the open time specified in the process of S1212 is started this time The round time is set as the round time (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1202.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 97), the opening operation can be set accurately for each round according to the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 98, the jackpot related process 3 (S4221) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The jackpot related process 3 (S4221) is a process that is executed instead of the jackpot related process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

  Of the jackpot-related processing 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, in each processing of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408, each of jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 is executed.

  In jackpot-related processing 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, if it is determined that the opening command has been received in the processing of S4401 (S4401: Yes), then whether or not a promotion effect is set or not In response to the command, an opening command process for setting a corresponding opening effect is executed (S4411), and this process ends. The details of the opening command process (S4411) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the round number command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4403 (S4403: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a winning command is included in the command received from the main control unit 110 (S4412). If it is determined in the process of S4412 that a winning command is included (S4412: Yes), the special winning opening (the left specific winning opening 656a, or the specific winning opening according to whether or not the promotion effect is being executed. A winning command process for setting a winning effect at the time of detecting a winning on the right specific winning opening 657a) is executed (S4413), and the processing is ended. The details of the winning command process (S4413) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that no winning command is included (S4412: No), the process proceeds to S4405.

  Further, in the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the closing command is received in the process of S4405 (S4405: Yes), the closing command process in the first embodiment (FIG. Instead of 49), the close command process 3 is executed (S4414), and this process is ended. The details of the close command process 3 (S4414) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the above-mentioned opening command process (S4411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the opening command process (S4411).

  In this opening command process (see FIG. 99), first, it is determined whether the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is on (S5201), and if it is determined that the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is on (S5201: Yes), The opening effect (see FIG. 89A) corresponding to the promotion effect is determined (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5204. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that the promotion in-progress flag 223k is off (S5201: No), an opening presentation of an aspect according to the current jackpot type is determined (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Transition. In addition, the aspect according to jackpot classification is production of the aspect as if door breakthrough mode presentation is continuing in the case of jackpot F3, G3. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type other than the jackpot F3, G3, it is an effect of an aspect in which it is reported that the jackpot has become.

  In the process of S5204, an opening command for display indicating the aspect of the opening effect determined in the process of S5202 or S5203 is set (S5204), and the process ends. By executing this opening command process, it is possible to execute an opening presentation in an appropriate manner depending on whether or not the promotion presentation is set.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 100, the details of the above-mentioned winning command processing (S4413) will be described. When this winning command processing (S4413) is executed, it is first determined whether the promotion effecting flag 223k is on (S5301), and if it is determined that the promotion effecting flag 223k is on (S5301: Yes ), An artillery effect (see FIG. 89 (b)) for firing the main symbol with the cannon 815 is executed (S5302), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5301 that the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is off (S5301: No), a winning effect of the normal mode is set (S5303), and the present process is ended. The prize effect in the normal mode indicates an effect that suggests acquisition of a winning ball. For example, an effect of acquiring a gold coin is performed, or an effect of displaying a character of “GET” is performed.

  By executing this winning command processing (refer to FIG. 100), in the first round of jackpot where the promotion effect is set, each time the ball enters the left specified winning opening 656a, the main symbol is staged by the bombardment effect Can be hidden with a smoke image. By performing an effect in which the main symbol is hidden and it is not known whether to promote or not, the player's expectation for promotion can be further enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, notification of whether to promote or not is performed in the interval period after the end of one round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a ball enters the left specified winning hole 656a, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to report the result, and when the lottery is won, one round of ending conditions (7 or more balls are won) Alternatively, the result may be reported even if 30 seconds have not elapsed. In addition, for example, when execution of the promotion effect is determined, it may be determined by lottery whether the result of the promotion effect is notified by the number of times of winning to the left specified winning opening 656a. By configuring in this way, every time the ball wins to the left specified winning opening 656a, it can be expected to be notified of the promotion, so the game in the first round of the jackpot where the promotion effect is set Can further improve the interest of Furthermore, in the case where the result of the promotion effect can be notified even if the end condition of the first round is not satisfied, the notification of the result before the end condition is satisfied may be limited to the case of promotion. . That is, when promotion is unsuccessful, promotion failure is always notified in the interval period after the end of the first round, while when promotion is successful, the left specified winning opening is made at a predetermined ratio. The notification may be performed with the number of winnings less than the upper limit number of winnings for 656a. By configuring in this manner, it is expected that promotion will be notified for each winning to the left specified winning opening 656a, but if promotion fails, expectation for promotion is longer (until the end of one round). Can be sustained.

  Next, the details of the closing command process 3 (S4414) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The closing command process 3 (S4414) is a process that is executed instead of the closing command process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment, as described above.

  Of the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, the processes of S4502 to S4505 are the same as the processes of S4502 to S4505 of the closing command process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed.

  When the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment is started, first, it is determined whether the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is on (S4511). If it is determined in the process of S4511 that the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is on (S4511: Yes), it means that the end condition of the first round of the jackpot for which the promotion effect is set is established. That is, this means that it is the timing to notify the result of the promotion effect, so next it is determined whether the jackpot under execution is one of the jackpot B3, C3 or E3 (S4512). If it is determined in the process of S4512 that neither jackpot B3, C3 nor E3 is used (S4512: No), the jackpot type for which the promotion promotion is currently set is jackpot A3, D3, or H3. means. In other words, it means that the jackpot type succeeds in promotion, so in this case, the interval effect (see FIG. 90 (b)) of notification of promotion success is set (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4515. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4512 that the jackpot being executed is any of the jackpots B3, C3 or E3 (S4512: Yes), it means that the jackpot type fails in promotion, After setting the interval effect in a mode in which promotion failure is notified (S4514), the process proceeds to S4515. In the processing of S4515, the end of the promotion effect is set by turning off the promotion effect in progress flag 223k (S4515), and the present process is ended.

  Further, in the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4511 that the promotion in-progress flag 223k is off (S4511: No), then the jackpot in progress It is determined whether or not the jackpot is F3 or G3 (S4516). If it is determined in the process of S4516 that the jackpot in progress is either the jackpot F3 or G3 (S4516: Yes), the process proceeds to S4502. On the other hand, in the process of S4516, when it is determined that the jackpot under execution is neither jackpot F3 nor G3 (S4516: No), interval effect according to the number of rounds is set (S4517), finish.

  By executing the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101), when the termination condition of the promotion effect is satisfied (the end timing of one round is reached), the result of the appropriate mode is informed according to the jackpot type. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the details of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) will be described. The variable display setting process 3 (S4131) is a process that is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. Of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) in the third embodiment, each process of S4801 to S4809 is the same as each process of S4801 to S4809 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment Processing is performed.

  Also, in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4803 ends, a promotion effect lottery process for judging (lottery) whether or not promotion effect is executable is executed (S4821 ), Shift the processing to S4804. The details of the promotion effect lottery process (S4821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 103), first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for notifying one of the big hit A3 to E3 and H3 (S5401), and the big hit A3 to H3 and E3 If it is determined that it is not a fluctuation pattern notifying any of them (that is, it is out of the range or a big hit is either F3 or G3) (S5401: No), there is no possibility to execute the promotion effect, so this processing is performed as it is Finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5401 that the fluctuation pattern is to notify any of the big hit A3 to E3 and H3 (S5401: Yes), a process for lottery whether or not the promotion effect is performed is executed. Specifically, first, the promotion effect lottery table 222b is read (S5402), and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is in the range of the counter value (random number value) corresponding to the type of the current big hit among the read out tables. It is determined (lottery) whether or not the promotion effect is to be performed by determining whether there is a matching value (S5403). Then, in the determination (lottery) by the process of S5403, it is determined whether the execution of the promotion effect is determined (S5404).

  If it is determined in the process of S5404 that the execution of the promotion effect has not been determined (S5404: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5404 that the execution of the promotion effect is determined (S5404: Yes), the promotion effect flag 223k is set to ON to indicate the execution of the promotion effect (S5405), and then this time It is determined whether the jackpot type of is the jackpot E3, H3 or not (S5406).

  In the process of S5406, when it is determined that neither jackpot E3 nor H3 is, it means that it becomes a jackpot of the first special symbol and it is determined that the promotion effect is determined, so the third symbol imitating an even is changed This symbol is set to the stop symbol at the time of stop (S5407), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot E3, H3 is one of the jackpot E3 and H3 in the process of S5406 (S5406: Yes), this means that the jackpot of the second special symbol is determined to be the promotion effect. The third symbol imitating an odd number other than "7" is set as the stop symbol at the time of the change stop (S5408), and this processing is ended.

  By this promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 103), it is possible to determine whether or not the promotion effect is executable (lottery), and to set the stop symbol when the promotion effect is won.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the ball can enter the ball if the left strike is possible (entering easier), and the ball can not enter the ball if the right strike is performed (the ball difficult to enter). The left specified winning combination 656a and the right specified winning combination 657a where the ball becomes enterable (entering easy) when you hit the right and the ball can not enter the ball when entering the left (it is difficult to enter the ball) There are two types of specified winning openings. When the ball enters the left specified winning opening 656a during the jackpot, the winning ball is paid out, and the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 inside the left variable winning device 656, and the special symbol is played after the big hit. Is given a definite change state. On the other hand, when the ball enters the right specified winning opening 657a, the same number of winning balls as in the case where the ball enters the left specified winning opening 656a is paid out, but the gaming state set after the big hit It does not affect In the third embodiment, as the type of jackpot, only the left specified winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds. A left hitting jackpot (If you hit the left rather than hitting the right in all rounds, you win the prize ball. A jackpot that makes it easy to win many) and the left specified winning opening 656a is opened in the first round, and the right specified winning opening 657a is opened in the other rounds (the right specified winning opening 657a is easily opened) In the second and subsequent rounds, the game is designed to provide a jackpot) in which it is easier to obtain a larger number of balls if you hit the right than hit the left. In the left strike jackpot, it is not necessary to hit the right during the big hit (there is little opportunity to hit the right), so it becomes difficult to collect the second special symbol holding balls in the jackpot, while the right hit jackpot is 2 The winning ball can not be obtained (it becomes difficult) if you do not hit the right after the round, so the holding ball of the second special symbol can be easily stored in the jackpot. Therefore, when it becomes the left hitting jackpot, it becomes difficult to execute the drawing of the 2nd special symbol which is disadvantageous after the end of the jackpot (the possibility that the jackpot of the 2nd special symbol is held at the end of the jackpot becomes low) On the other hand, if it is a big hit in the right, it will be easier to carry out the lottery of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous after the end of the big hit (possibility of the big hit of the second special symbol being held at the end of the big hit) Is higher than the left hitting jackpot). Thereby, after the end of the left hitting jackpot, it is possible to play the game with confidence until it becomes the next jackpot. On the other hand, after the end of the right hitting jackpot, it is possible to play a game expecting that it will not be a jackpot until all the drawing of the disadvantageous second special symbol based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is finished. As described above, in the third embodiment, since it is possible to switch the game after the big hit according to the big hit type, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. Also, in addition to the gaming state set after the number of rounds of the jackpot and the jackpot, it is also possible to vary the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery after the jackpot (the ease of carrying out the pending inner row) according to the jackpot type Can. This makes it possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. Thus, the player can be more satisfied when the player wins the most advantageous left-handed jackpot.

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be performed over the period from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, the promotion effect is continued even after passing through the probability change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after the sphere passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 and it is determined that the probability variation state is established, the result of the promotion effect can be noticed, so the sphere passes the probability variation switch 65e3 Even after that, you can make it pay attention to the effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming the work for simply obtaining the prize ball, so it is possible to improve the interest for the game during the jackpot.

  In the third embodiment, the right specified winning opening 656a is opened in the first round of the big hit, whether it is the right hitting big hit or the left hitting big hit, but it is not limited to this, the right hitting big hit The round in which the left specified winning opening 656a is opened in the case, and the number of times may be determined arbitrarily. When the left specified winning opening 656a is configured to be opened in rounds other than the first round with a right-handed jackpot, the first specified winning opening 657a is opened in the first round, thereby starting the first round. At the moment the jackpot type is known. Therefore, the promotion effect may be performed in the opening period while the jackpot type is unknown.

  In the third embodiment, two types of variable winning devices, the left variable winning device 656 and the right variable winning device 657, are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13, respectively, but in the same manner as in the first embodiment The variable winning device may be provided only on the right side of the board 13. The storage valve 63a may be provided upstream of the second ball entry port 640, as in the modification of the second embodiment described above. Then, instead of providing a left hitting jackpot and a right hitting jackpot, the storage state of the storage valve 63a is maintained during the big hit (that is, the ball reaches the second entrance port 640 even if the right hit is performed during the big hit) It may be configured to provide the impossible jackpot type and the jackpot type in which the storage state is released (that is, the ball can reach the second entrance 640 when the player hits the right during the jackpot). By configuring in this manner, the number of variable winning devices can be reduced, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, as the promotion effect, the effect of firing the third symbol with the cannon 815 is executed, but the effect mode of the promotion effect is not limited to this. Any effect mode may be set as long as the effect can be easily notified to the player of two types of modes of successful promotion and failure modes. For example, an adventure displayed at the time of door breakthrough mode effect The person 811 may attack the third symbol to execute an effect of promoting the symbol. Further, the promotion effect is not limited to the effect of promoting the third symbol. Instead of displaying the third symbol, for example, it may be configured such that an adventurer 811 and an enemy perform a battle to perform a battle, and to notify the left hitting jackpot by winning the enemy. Thereby, the freedom of presentation can be further enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the timing at which the result of the promotion effect is notified is set to the end timing of the first round, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to notify the result of the promotion effect, triggered by the fact that a predetermined number (for example, five) of balls have won on the left specified winning opening 656a. In addition, the number of winning prizes serving as a trigger for notifying the result does not have to be fixed, and may be determined by, for example, lottery. In this case, it is also possible to set the number of winning combinations that has a high percentage of selection in the case of a left-handed big hit, or the percentage of winning selected in the case of a right-handed big hit. By configuring in this manner, a player who wishes to detect a jackpot type (whether it is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot) at an early timing can be identified left by the timing at which the result of the promotion effect is notified A game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls that have won (entered) a winning opening 656a. Therefore, the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot can be further improved.

  In the third embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the promotion effect is to be executed by lottery when it is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to always execute the promotion effect. As a result, since the lottery process of the promotion effect can be omitted, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, for example, when it becomes the right hitting jackpot, it is configured to execute the promotion effect of the aspect which always fails in promotion, and when it becomes the left hitting jackpot, the number of "7" in the variable display effect by lottery The third symbol imitating the symbol is fixedly displayed, or the main symbol imitating the even number is once displayed, and it is determined whether the promotion effect is promoted to the third symbol imitating the number "7" It may be By configuring in this way, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, it is possible to play a jackpot game in expectation of promotion each time. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is definitely displayed by the variable display effect without performing the promotion effect for all the jackpot types. Thereby, since it is possible to execute any presentation in the opening period of the jackpot or the first round, it is possible to enhance the freedom of presentation.

  In the third embodiment, the left special event is a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and when the promotion effect is performed, the variable display effect is always configured to display the third symbol imitating an even number. Not limited to this. For example, a third symbol imitating an odd number other than "7" may be displayed in a definite manner, and promoted to a main symbol imitating a number "7" by a promotion effect. In the third embodiment, the promotion effect is performed from the opening period of the jackpot to the first round of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the promotion effect may be executed within the fluctuation period of the fluctuation display effect informing the jackpot, or the promotion effect may be executed over the fluctuation period and the opening period of the jackpot.

  In the third embodiment, the promotion effect is configured as an effect for notifying whether it is a left hitting jackpot or a right hitting jackpot, but a left hitting jackpot, a pachinko without a distinction between a right hitting jackpot The present invention may be applied to a machine 10 (e.g., a general game machine in which a big and small jackpot and a big and big jack are usually present). More specifically, for example, in the case of a probability variation jackpot, the third symbol that simulates even numbers by the variable display effect, or the third symbol that simulates odd numbers is configured to be determined and displayed On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit normally, it is constituted so that the 3rd design which imitated the number of an even number is fixedly displayed by change display production. Then, when the third symbol imitating the even number is displayed in a definite variation big hit, and it may be configured to execute the promotion effect of promoting to the third symbol imitating the odd number after that. On the other hand, in the case of the normal jackpot, the promotion effect of the mode in which the promotion fails may be performed at a predetermined rate. Thereby, the versatility of a promotion production can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, the positive variation switch 65e3 is provided only inside the left variable winning device 656, and if the ball is not inserted into the left variable winning device 656 during the big hit, the positive variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit. It was not configured. That is, even in the case of a right-handed jackpot, the first round is configured to play a game aiming at the left variable winning device 656 by hitting left, but it is not limited to this. For example, similarly to the left variable winning device 656, the probability changing switch 65e3 may be provided inside the right variable winning device 657. Then, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, it may be configured that only the right variable winning device 657 can enter the ball in all rounds. By configuring in this way, the game will pass the ball to the probability change switch 65e3 and win the prize ball by left hitting only in the first round when the jackpot hits the jackpot, and will stop the firing of the ball in the remaining rounds It can prevent the method from being carried out. That is, in order to avoid the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 during the right hitting jackpot, the left specified winning hole 656a can only hit the ball in the round (the first round) where the ball can be entered. Anomalous game methods can be suppressed. When this unusual game method is executed, although the number of prize balls obtained at the right hitting jackpot is small (only one round can be obtained), the lottery for the second special symbol which is disadvantageous is not executed, so it is usually the case There is no fall into mode. As a result, the probability change state may continue semipermanently, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. On the other hand, with the configuration in which only the right variable winning device 657 is set so as to be able to enter in a right-handed jackpot, the above-mentioned unusual game method can be fundamentally broken. Thus, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage to the hole.

  In the third embodiment, depending on the jackpot type, by changing the ease of ball entry to the second entrance 640 during the jackpot, among the holding balls held at the end of the jackpot The configuration is such that the possibility of including a jackpot (so-called possibility of occurrence of a pending connection) is made variable. That is, by switching the direction in which the winning balls can be obtained by firing the balls in accordance with the jackpot type, the configuration has been made to differ the possibility of the occurrence of the pending inner link physically, but it is limited to this It is not something that can be done. For example, the configuration may be configured to vary the ease of occurrence of the on-hold chopsticks in control. More specifically, for example, as in the first embodiment, a specific winning opening for winning a winning ball only in the big hit is provided only on the right side of the game board 13, and then a special symbol in a certain variation state The number of lotterys to be selected may be varied according to the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot for which the number of lottery for becoming a probability change state is 1 and a jackpot for 4 times may be provided). By configuring in this way, in the case of a jackpot type in which the number of lottery to be in a definite variation state is one, the probability of becoming a jackpot in the second and subsequent special symbol lottery decreases, so even the first lottery is out. If so, the possibility of being missed in all lottery based on the holding ball becomes high. On the other hand, when the number of lottery to be in the definite variation state is four, all the lottery based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is executed in the definite variation state of the special symbol, so it is reserved at the big hit end time There is a high probability of winning in a draw based on the holding ball. Therefore, the operation | movement similar to 3rd Embodiment mentioned above is realizable only by one variable winning prize apparatus. In addition, when it is set as the structure which is made to complete a definite change state by the lottery frequency predetermined according to big hit classification like this modification, for example, all lottery based on the holding ball of the 2nd special symbol will be out. As a bonus in the case of a drop, it may be configured to be in a time-saving state of a normal symbol. That is, regardless of the number of lotterys in which the special symbol is in a definite variation state and the number of lotterys in which the time symbol in the normal symbol is different, for example, 100 special symbol lotterys are made. It may be configured to be in a time-short state of a normal symbol over the time it is finished. In this case, as a more advantageous jackpot type, a probability variation state of the special symbol may not be given, and a jackpot type in which only the time saving state is given may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform all the drawing based on the holding ball of the second special symbol executed after the big hit with the low probability state of the special symbol, so that the drawing of the second special symbol is all out Can be more likely.

  In the third embodiment, by providing a jackpot type in which the holding balls of the second special symbol can easily be stored in the jackpot and a jackpot type in which it is difficult to be stored, the jackpot balls are again held at the jackpot end point. Although it was set as the structure which makes the possibility of becoming different for every jackpot type, it is not restricted to this. For example, by providing a jackpot type in which the holding balls of the normal symbol can easily be stored in the jackpot, and a jackpot type in which the holding balls of the normal symbol are difficult to be stored in the jackpot, the number of balls for holding the ordinary symbol It may be configured to vary the possibility of occurrence of a hit of a regular symbol after a big hit. In addition, by changing the probability of hitting a normal symbol after a big hit depending on the type of big hit, a predetermined symbol after the big hit ends (for example, until all the holding balls of a normal symbol at the end of the big hit are digested) The ratio of winning in the win may be varied according to the jackpot type. Even when configured in this manner, the degree of advantage of the player can be made different according to the jackpot type, so it is possible to play a game paying attention to the jackpot type.

  In the third embodiment, when the promotion effect is set, the ball enters the specified winning hole 656a in the first round, and the ball is determined to be a definite variation of the special symbol after a big hit. Every time the player enters the left specified winning combination port 656a, it is configured to execute an effect (an effect of bombarding the third symbol) asking for a sense of anticipation whether or not to promote, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the promotion effect may be performed in the opening period of the jackpot. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, an effect (for example, an effect that an image imitating the letter "V" is displayed) is executed to indicate that the left specified winning opening 656a is a round to be opened. Good. By configuring in this manner, the player does not notice that the jackpot has been started, and continues watching the result of the promotion effect, and fails to enter the ball into the left specified winning hole 656a (a jackpot of a definite change) Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the probability change state from being given after the jackpot). Also, for example, in the first round of the jackpot, the effect indicating that the left specified winning opening 656a is a round is opened during the first round (even after the ball enters the left specified winning opening 656a) The configuration may be continued to be executed, and the promotion effect may be executed after one round is completed. Even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from being inserted incorrectly into the left specified winning opening 656a, so it is possible to suppress the player from becoming excessively disadvantageous. Furthermore, the promotion effect is not executed at all (that is, the third symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot type is always stopped and displayed in the variable display), and during the jackpot it is a round in which the left specified winning opening 656a is opened. It is good also as composition which continues performing an effect which shows whether it is whether it is during each round. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from making a mistake in the direction in which the ball is shot.

  In the third embodiment, when the ball entered into the inside of the left variable winning device 656 passes through the probability change switch 65 e 3, 1 of the jackpot for the pachinko machine 10 of the spec that shifts to the probability change state after the jackpot ends. In the round, it was made a prize to the left specified winning a prize mouth 656a, after the definite change state was decided, it made the constitution which reports the result of the promotion production, but the spec which can apply the promotion production is something which is limited to this Absent. The promotion effect can be applied as long as it is a specification that may shift to a state advantageous to the player or a state disadvantageous to the advantageous state at a predetermined opportunity. For example, when a ball enters a specific area inside the variable winning device provided in the game board, the promotion effect may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 of the spec to which the jackpot is given. That is, in the lottery based on the start winning, it is assumed that a lottery is made to determine whether the ball easily enters the variable winning device (whether or not the variable winning device can move), and the variable winning device is won Even in this case, it is the spec that the jackpot is not given unless the variable winning device enters the ball and the ball does not enter the specific area. In this specification, the type of jackpot given when a ball enters a specific area may be notified after the ball enters the specific area and the jackpot is determined. More specifically, at the time of winning the lottery of movable propriety of the variable winning device, a lottery of jackpot type given when entering a specific area and a lottery of execution of promotion effect are lottery. Then, when the lottery for promotion effect is won, even if the advantageous jackpot type is won, the combination (for example, the same number of even numbers) of the third symbols corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type is displayed. And when the variable winning device is moved and the ball is allowed to enter the ball and the ball is made to enter the variable winning device and the ball is made to enter the specific area, it corresponds to the original big hit type Perform the rendering to display the third symbol combination (for example, promote to the same number of odd numbers or keep the same number of even numbers). By configuring in this manner, even after the ball enters the specific area, attention can be given to the effect in anticipation of notification of the advantageous jackpot type by the promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the game between entering the specific area and the end of the jackpot is as if it were merely a task for obtaining a winning ball. That is, since it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability change switch 65e3 is not provided (the gaming state after the big hit is determined in advance according to the big hit type), the gaming state after the big hit can be notified by promotion effect May be In other words, during the jackpot, it is difficult for the player to identify which of the time reduction state and the definite change state is set after the large hit, and then the time reduction state is set and the partial change state is set. And inform that the time saving state is reached at the end of the jackpot. Then, when the definite change state is set, the promotion effect is executed after the big hit, and the positive change state is made as a result of the promotion effect based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, when a predetermined number of start winnings is detected) It may be configured to execute the effect to be promoted. In addition, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit and the promotion effect is executed, the effect of failing to promote to the probability change state may be executed based on a predetermined opportunity. In addition, for the pachinko machine 10 for which the same opening pattern is set for the specific winning opening by the small hitting and the so-called bumping, it is notified that it is a small hitting once and the winning is won A may be configured to notify the promotion to a certainty at a predetermined opportunity by a promotion effect. Furthermore, the jackpot type in which the opening pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch is set, and the jackpot type in which the opening pattern not capable of passing the probability variation switch is set, the opening pattern which can not pass through the probability variation switch is set The jackpot type may be notified, and the promotion to the jackpot type may be notified in which an open pattern capable of passing the probability change switch at a predetermined opportunity is set.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. In the third embodiment described above, when the jackpot for which the promotion effect is set is started, the promotion effect is executed over the opening period of the jackpot, the round period of the first round, and the interval period. In the promotion effect, an effect of promoting the combination of the main symbols fixedly displayed in the variable display effect for notifying the jackpot to the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the jackpot having a high degree of advantage for the player is executed and promoted If it succeeds, it is configured to be informed that it is a more advantageous jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, the configuration is such that the variable display effect of one is pseudo-executed in the execution period of the variable display notifying the big hit and the period from the start of the big hit to the interval period of the first round. And Thereby, in addition to whether or not to be a big hit, it is possible to notify by the variable display effect of 1 also about the big hit type (whether it is a left hitting big hit or a right hitting big hit) when becoming a big hit.

  FIG. 104 (a) is a display that may be displayed when the left hit in the lottery of the special symbol (a big hit D3, H3 either) and when the reach state occurs out in the lottery of the special symbol It is the figure which showed the aspect. As shown in FIG. 104 (a), in the present modification, when the reach state occurs, the character “left-handed” and the image of the arrow pointing left are displayed on the upper left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display area HR1 in which is displayed is displayed. Further, in the upper central portion of the display screen, a display area HR5 in which the characters "Please hit the left to stop the design !!" is displayed. With these displays, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the symbol is stopped and displayed by firing the ball to the left.

  In the case of the jackpot, the display mode shown in FIG. 104 (a) is set at the timing when the opening period of the jackpot is started. That is, in the present modification, the third symbol is not displayed in a stopped state even in the opening period of the big hit, and remains in the reach state. Under this circumstance, if it does not indicate a left strike, it may be delayed to launch the ball toward the left specified winning opening 656a in the first round. If launch to the left specified winning opening 656a is delayed, there is a possibility that the ball can not enter during the opening period of the left specified winning opening 656a (the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3), and it becomes a probability change jackpot There is a possibility that the definite change state is not given after the big hit despite the fact. In order to prevent such a situation, in this modification, at the time when the opening period is started during the execution of the variable display, an effect (see FIG. 104A) is suggested to suggest a left strike. In addition, in order to prevent (suppress) whether the display mode is perceived as a big hit or not, predetermined timing (for example, one second before the final display of the third symbol) is performed even during execution of the variable display of deviation. Thus, an effect (see FIG. 104 (a)) that suggests a left strike is executed. This makes it possible to make it difficult to determine whether the jackpot or the jackpot is out until the third symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the player's expectation for the jackpot can be maintained longer.

  FIG. 104 (b) is a view showing a display mode when the jackpot D3 or H3 is obtained and all the third symbols are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), the number of "7" is triggered by the player hitting the left during the execution of the effect indicating the left hitting and the ball entering the left specified winning opening 656a. The effect that the 3rd design (main design) imitating is aligned is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the player has hit the left. Also, by notifying the big hit based on the ball entering the left specified winning opening 656a, pay attention to the whereabouts of the fired ball (whether to enter the left specified winning opening 656a) I can play a game. Thus, the player's willingness to participate can be improved. It should be noted that if the special design lottery is out and the left suggestion winning effect is executed, the left specified winning opening 656a is not opened, so the ball fired by left hitting enters the left specified winning opening 656a. There is nothing to do. In this case, after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the effect indicating left-handed strike is executed, the stop symbol of the combination of the outs (combinations other than the eyes) is stopped and displayed.

  In the example of FIG. 104, although the case in which the jackpots D3 and G3 are obtained is described as an example, the same effect is performed in other jackpots. That is, when the jackpot A3 or E3 is reached, an effect in which the third symbol (main symbol) imitating an odd number other than “7” is aligned is executed, and when the jackpot B3 or C3 is reached, the even number is even An effect is performed in which the third symbol (main symbol) that imitates the numbers is aligned. In addition, in the case of being out with the reach state, the reach state may be reached with numbers other than "7".

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the time-dependent change in the effect mode after the variable display effect is started, in the case of a big hit in the drawing of the special symbol and in the case of being out with the reach state. First, with reference to FIG. 105 (a), the time-dependent change of the effect mode in the case of the jackpot will be described.

  FIG. 105 (a) shows the time-dependent change of the presentation mode in the case of developing into a super reach and becoming a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is started, first, after the normal variable display is performed for 10 seconds, a reach state occurs at 10 seconds elapsed time. . Then, after reaching normal reach production for 20 seconds, it develops into super reach production when 30 seconds pass from the start of fluctuation. Furthermore, after the super reach effect continues for 28 seconds, an effect indicating left hitting (left hit navigation, see FIG. 104A) is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), at the time when the effect suggesting left hitting is displayed, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display corresponding to the big hit actually passes, and the opening period of the big hit is entered. ing. For this reason, in the first symbol display device 37, the variation display of the first symbol (special symbol) is ended when 58 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation, and a stop symbol indicating a big hit is displayed.

  When one second of the opening period has passed and the ball enters the left specified winning opening 656a after the left specified winning opening 656a is opened, the third symbol (the same number is simulated in the third symbol display device 81) An effect (see FIG. 104 (b)) in which the main symbol is aligned is executed. And it is notified that it became a big hit, and the production which shows that it is in big hit is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), even when the lottery result of the out-of-place with reach condition is reached, the left display navigation (see FIG. 104 (a)) is displayed after the variable display is started. The effect mode is common to the jackpot case (see FIG. 105A). Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), in the case of detachment, one second after the left-handed navigation (see FIG. 104 (a)) is displayed, the combination of the third symbols showing the detachment is stopped and displayed. And it is informed that it has come off.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 105, the fluctuation time in the case of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is set to be shorter by 2 seconds than the fluctuation time in the case of becoming a deviation. This is because when the variable display of the deviation is executed, while the lottery result of the special symbol is informed within the execution period of the variable display, when the fluctuation display of the win is executed, the jackpot of This is because the variable display is performed over the opening period and the period of the first round. If the same variation time is set for the jackpot and the gap, the timing for generating the left-handed navigation will be shifted between the case of the jackpot and the gap, and the drawing result will be drawn before the variation production ends from the difference in the variation time. There is a risk of being perceived. On the other hand, in the present modification, since the variation time is longer when out of the jackpot than in the jackpot, it is possible to match the timing for displaying the left-handed navigation between the jackpot and the jackpot. Therefore, since it becomes difficult to detect the lottery result of the special symbol from the fluctuation time, it is possible to draw attention by the result of the fluctuation display effect.

  As explained above, in the modification of the third embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation period of the variation pattern, the opening period of the big hit, and the period of the first round It was set as the structure which performs 1 fluctuation display production. By configuring in this way, in addition to whether or not a jackpot, it is also possible to notify the type of jackpot in the variable display effect of 1 so that the game is played by paying attention to the variable display effect Can.

  In addition, in this modification, when it is set as a reach state with the kind of the number corresponding to big hit classification, when it becomes big hit in the fluctuation display production, as well as the 3rd embodiment mentioned above, execution of the promotion effect is carried out. It may be configured to draw lots. Then, when execution of the promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect is performed using the remaining period after the jackpot symbol was notified in the first round of the jackpot and the interval period after the first round is finished. May be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect that the promotion effect will be performed even if the third symbol to which an even number has been assigned once is equalized, so that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  In this modification, an image suggesting a left hit is displayed in the display area HR1 at the upper left of the display screen during the opening period of the jackpot and the last two seconds of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the disconnection. It is not something that can be done. For example, the effect of suggesting a left hit to the player may be performed in a manner that is more prominent than the third symbol during fluctuation. Specifically, for example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the above-mentioned modification, the character “Aim for V !!” and the left variable winning device 656 for the layer on the near side of the third symbol in motion. It may be configured to display an image schematically shown. Then, when the ball enters the left specified winning hole 656a (when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit), the image in which the third symbol imitating the same number is aligned and stopped is displayed As a background, an image imitating the letter "V" may be displayed on the front side of the third pattern. The display of the image imitating the letter "V" may be continued, for example, until the end of one round. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to watch the result of the effect without launching the ball until the variable display ends. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot, it is possible to more reliably cause the ball to enter the left specified winning opening 656a in the first round. In addition, for example, the third symbol during variation may be displayed in a semitransparent manner to make the effect suggesting a left strike more noticeable, or the third symbol may be temporarily hidden.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 112. In the first embodiment described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is out, it is configured with a small probability with a high probability, the opening period of the open / close door 65f1 in the case of a small probability, the jackpot E, The opening period of the open / close door 65f1 in each round of F is configured to be the same (0.2 seconds). Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of jackpots E and F is configured to be one second which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol . In this way, even when the big hit E or F is included in the second special symbol holding ball held at the end of the big hit, it is in the period until the door breakthrough mode effect is finished also in the case of all being out. The series of opening and closing operations of the opening and closing door 65f1 are configured to be the same.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the jackpot of the type in which the player can easily detect whether or not the result of the variable display of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot is out, and the type in which it is difficult to detect It was set as the structure which provides a jackpot. In this way, depending on the jackpot type, it is not possible to know whether or not the second special symbol is included until the result of the door breakthrough mode presentation is confirmed, and the game performance of the door breakthrough mode presentation whether or not it is out It is possible to switch between easy-to-sense gameplay.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the main The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is partially changed. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107, the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13A) in that the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b and the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed. It differs in the point which has become. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing defined contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106, in the fourth embodiment, five jackpot types of jackpots A4 to E4 are provided as jackpot types of the first special symbol. Moreover, as a jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of jackpots F4 to H4 are provided.

  The jackpots A4, B4, D4, and F4 to H4 are jackpot types that perform the same operation as the jackpots A to F in the first embodiment, respectively. That is, each of the jackpots A4 and F4 is a jackpot of 16 rounds, the jackpot B4 is a jackpot of 5 rounds, and the jackpot D4 is a jackpot of 2 rounds. In these jackpots, since the open / close door 65f1 is opened for up to 30 seconds in each round, it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls in the jackpot and easily pass the balls to the probability switch 65e3 in the jackpot Can. Also, the jackpot G4 is a jackpot with seven rounds, and the jackpot H4 is a jackpot with six rounds. In these jackpots, since the open / close door 65f1 is opened for at most 0.2 seconds in each round, it is hardly possible to obtain a prize ball, and the possibility that the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot is also almost Absent.

  Whether jackpot C4 is the same as jackpot B4 (5 round jackpot), but after the jackpot is finished, the second special symbol lottery is out during the execution of the variable display based on the second special symbol holding ball It becomes easy to distinguish. More specifically, when the jackpot becomes C4, after the jackpot ends, when it is out in the second special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the length different from the interval period (one second) of the jackpot G4, H4 (3 (Seconds) is easier to select. Therefore, by observing the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (the open / close door 65f1) is opened, it can be estimated whether or not the drawing of the special symbol is out. That is, if the player feels that the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened clearly exceeds one second after a big hit, the opening this time is a special symbol (small hit). It can be recognized that there is a high possibility of being open based on events.

  The jackpot E4 is the jackpot D4 and the operation is the same (two round jackpot), but as with the jackpot C4, it is a jackpot type that makes it easy to determine whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol is out after the jackpot is over.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot C4 or the jackpot E4 is reached, whether or not the specified winning hole 65a (the open / close door 65f1) is released by observing the opening interval It is configured to be able to guess. Thereby, after the big hit ends, it is possible to play the game paying attention not only to the contents of the door breakthrough mode effect but also to the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a (the opening and closing door 65f1). In particular, while the rendering of an aspect (a rendering to open the door 814 using the key 813 in a batter-like aspect) is executed while the rendering of the aspect having a high risk of becoming the jackpot of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous If it is felt that the opening interval of the winning opening 65a has exceeded one second, the possibility of the fluctuation display corresponding to the deviation is increased, so the player can be relieved. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the explanation, a jackpot (jack C4, E4) that is easy to guess whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol performed after the jackpot is out will be referred to as "special hit".

  On the other hand, when it comes to jackpots A4, B4, D4 and F4, as in the first embodiment, whether the lottery result of the second special symbol to be executed after the jackpot has fallen out (small hit) or it has become the jackpot It becomes impossible (difficult) to identify from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, according to the jackpot type, until it is confirmed the result of the door breakthrough mode effect, the game property which does not know whether or not the hit of the second special symbol is included, and whether or not it is out Since it is possible to switch to the game characteristic which is easy to detect during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the fourth embodiment, the big hit B4 and the big hit C4 are configured so that the big hit operation (the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81) is completely the same. There is. Similarly, with regard to the jackpot D4 and the jackpot E4, the operation during the jackpot is configured to be exactly the same. For this reason, when the jackpot is finished in the second round or the fifth round, it is out of play and it is not clear whether or not the second special symbol hit is included until the result of the door breakthrough mode presentation is confirmed It becomes difficult to identify which of the game characteristics which are easy to detect during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect is set. Therefore, even if the same period as the interval period is continuously set as the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened, does the second special symbol's hit be included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is confirmed? It is possible to make the player think that the game property is set which is unclear. Therefore, it is possible to play the game expecting to shift to the probability change mode until the door breakthrough mode effect is finished.

  As shown in FIG. 106, for the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot A4" is defined in association with the range of the value "0 to 9" of the first hit type counter C2, and "10 to 19" For the range of "", the "big hit B4" is defined in association with the "20 to 89" range, the "big hit C4" is defined in association with the range of "90, 91". “D4” is defined in association with the “big hit E4” in the range of “92 to 99”. That is, in the "big hit B4" and "big hit C4" of the 5 rounds big hit, the ratio in which "big hit C4" (special hit) is selected is configured to be higher (it becomes easier to be selected 7 times) . In addition, in "big hit D4" and "big hit E4" of the two rounds big hit, the ratio that "big hit E4" (special hit) is selected is configured to be higher (it becomes easier to be selected five times) . By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily set the game characteristic that is easy to detect during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect as to whether or not it has come off. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to play a game paying more attention to the operation of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In addition, since the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each of the big hits F4 to H4 is the same as the big hits D to F in the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 107 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15 (a)). The difference is that the hit and hit table 202 d 8 and the special hit and hit off table 202 d 9 are added.

  When the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed after the special hit (big hit C4 or E4) is 4 or less, the special hit post hit table 202d8 becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery Is a data table to be referred to. In addition, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol executed after the special hitting ends is 4 times or less, the special hitting back-off table 202d9 falls out (small hit) by the second special symbol lottery Is a data table to be referred to. Details of the special hit back hit table 202d8 and the special hit back attachment table 202d9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (b) and (c).

  FIG. 107 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the special hitting / after hitting table 202d8. As shown in FIG. 107 (b), in the special hitting later hitting table 202d8, a “hit middle fluctuation” having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with the value “0” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time per one second is defined in association with the range of “1 to 198”. For this reason, if it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol after the end of the special hit, although the variation time of 1 second is set with high probability (198/199), with low probability (1/199) The fluctuation time of 3 seconds may be set. For this reason, when the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set (the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a becomes 3 seconds), it does not mean that it is decided that the lottery result of small (small hit) has come, but the big hit There is also the possibility of

  FIG. 107 (c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the special hit / posting removal table 202d9. As shown in FIG. 107 (c), the special hit back-off table 202d9 corresponds to "out-of-middle change" with a change time of 3 seconds for the range "0 to 66" of the value of the change type counter CS1. In addition, "outout short fluctuation" having a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined in association with the range of "67 to 198". For this reason, if the special hit after the special hit is missed (small hit) in the second special symbol lottery, the variation time of 3 seconds is set at a rate of about 34% (67/199). That is, the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a is 3 seconds or more. As described above, when a special winning after the special hit and a big win in the second special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected with very low probability, so the fluctuation time has become 3 seconds ( When the player recognizes that the time has exceeded 1 second, it can be considered that the currently running fluctuation display is highly likely to be the corresponding fluctuation display. Therefore, while the door breakthrough mode effect is being performed, it is possible to realize the game characteristic that the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode can be predicted from the set fluctuation time. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 108, in the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment, a fluctuation number counter 203ca and a special hit after flag 203cb are added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18). There is a difference in points.

  The fluctuation number counter 203ca is a counter that counts the number of fluctuation display (special symbol lottery) of special symbols executed after a big hit. The variation count counter 203ca has an initial value set to 0, and is incremented by 1 each time the variation start timing of the special symbol is reached (see S2001 in FIG. 110 and S2201 in FIG. 112). In addition, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol, it is reset to 0 which is the initial value (see S253 in Figure 109). When the second special symbol lottery is executed, one data table for determining a fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d according to the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca (FIG. 111 See S2103 and S2109).

  The special hit after flag 203cb is a flag indicating whether the previous jackpot was a special hit (big hit C3 or E3). If the special hit after flag 203cb is on, it means that the previous jackpot is a special hit, and if it is off, it means that the previous jackpot is not a special hit. The special hit flag 203cb has its initial value set to OFF, and is updated according to the jackpot type at the start of the jackpot (see S254 in FIG. 109). When the second special symbol lottery is executed, this special hit after flag 203cb is referred to, and one data table for determining a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. 111 See S2105 and S2111). In the fourth embodiment, the special hit flag 203cb is updated when setting the start of the big hit, but may be set at the end of the big hit.

Regarding Control Processing of Main Control Device in Fourth Embodiment
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 109 to 112. First, the special symbol variation process 4 (S131) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol variation process 4 (S131) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

  Of the special symbol variation processing 4 (refer to FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment is carried out in each of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220 and S221 (see FIG. 28). The same processing as each processing of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221) is executed.

  Moreover, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S207 is finished, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol The process is executed (S251), and the process ends. The details of the special view 2 change start process (S251) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111.

  Moreover, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S212 is finished, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol Is executed (S252), and the present process ends. The details of the special view 1 change start process (S252) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit in the process of S218 (S218: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is reset to off. At the same time, the fluctuation number counter 203ca is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S253). Next, the special hit after flag 203cb is updated according to the type of the jackpot won this time (S254), and the process proceeds to S220. In the process of S254, the special hit after flag 203cb is set to ON when it is the special hit (one of the large hit C3 and E3) that has been won this time, and is set to OFF when it is the other big hit type. By switching the state of the special hit after flag 203cb according to the jackpot type, it is possible to switch the data table to be referred to select the variation pattern according to the state of the special hit after flag 203cb after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when the special hit after flag 203cb is on, the variation pattern of the second special symbol after the big hit is determined with reference to the special hit after hit table 202d8 and the special hit after release table 202d9. Is determined, it is possible to set the game characteristic which can be relatively easily guessed whether or not it has become off based on the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a. Further, if the special hit after flag 203cb is off, it is set the game characteristic that it is difficult to identify from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a whether the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed after the big hit is hit or missed .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the details of the special view 2 fluctuation start process (S251) described above will be described. This special figure 2 change start process (S251) is a process for starting the change pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol, as described above.

  In this special view 2 change start process (see FIG. 110), first, the value of the change number counter 203ca is updated by adding 1 (S2001), and the data of the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired To do (S2002). Next, the probability change flag 203g is read out to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the probability change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the probability change flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state. In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the definite variation state of the special symbol (S2003: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S2002 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is acquired (S2004). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13B). As described above, 40 random numbers from "0 to 39" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S2006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not the definite variation state of the special symbol (the low probability state of the special symbol) (S2003: No), the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S2002. On the basis of the value of and the first random number table for low probability (refer to FIG. 13B), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S2005). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number to be hit (that is, "0 to 39"), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is a jackpot. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S2006.

  And special figure 2 fluctuation pattern decision processing for determining the fluctuation pattern of the 2nd special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol which is acquired with the processing of S2004 or S2005 is executed (S2006). The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) is ended, next, the fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) is set ( S2007). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern this time is set in the fluctuation time counter 223f (S2008). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) is set (S2009), and this process is ended. The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) described above will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) is a process for determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol as described above.

  In this special figure 2 change pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a big hit (S2101), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (S2101: Yes), special figure 2 change start Based on the value of the first collision type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the process (see FIG. 110), the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S2102). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the special view 2 change start process (see FIG. 110) is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106). , Determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, when the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is a big hit F4 (16 round probability variation big hit) If it is in the range of "5-49", it is determined that it is jackpot G4 (7 round normally jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99" it is jackpot H4 (6 round normally jackpot) It determines (refer FIG. 106).

  In the process of S2102, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (big hit F4 to H4). Further, the jackpot type (big hit F4 to H4) is set as the stop type in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type.

  When the process of S2102 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2103), and if it is 5 or more (S2103: Yes), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d The table 202d5 is read out (more than 5 variations) (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2114.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2103 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2103: No), it is determined whether the post special hit flag 203cb is on (S2105), the post special hit flag If 203cb is on (S2105: Yes), the special hit back hit table 202d8 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2114. If it is determined in the process of S2105 that the special hit flag 203cb is off (S2105: No), the table 202d4 for each special figure (4 or less variation) is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d ( S2107), the process proceeds to S2114.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2101 that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out (S2101: No), first, the display mode at the time of out is set (S2108). In the process of S2108, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the third symbol display device is based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As a stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is a reach before or after, a reach other than before or after, or a complete miss.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of fluctuation number counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2109), and when it is determined that it is 5 or more (S2109: Yes), special figure 2 deviates from fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (5 fluctuation or more ) The table 202d7 is read out (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2114. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2109 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2109: No), it is determined whether the post special hit flag 203cb is on (S2111), the special hit back If the flag 203cb is on (S2111: Yes), the special hit back-off table 202d9 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2112), and the process proceeds to S2114. If it is determined in the process of S2111 that the special hit flag 203cb is off (S2111: No), the special pattern 2 deviation table (4 variations or less) table 202d6 is read out from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2113). ), The process proceeds to S2114.

  In the process of S2114, based on the data table read by any of S2104, S2106, S2107, S2110, S2112, and S2113 and the value of the variation type counter CS1, the lottery result of the current special symbol is displayed. The variation pattern to be shown is determined (S2114), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (S252) described above will be described. This special view 1 fluctuation start process (S252) is a process for starting the fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, as described above.

  In the processes of S2201 to S2205 and S2214 to S2216 of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 112), S2001 to S2005 and S2007 to S2007 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 110) described above. The same process as each process of S2009 is performed.

  Moreover, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (refer to FIG. 112), when the process of S2204 or S2205 ends, next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S2204 or S2205 is a big hit ( S2206), when it is determined that it is a big hit (S2206: Yes), a big hit display mode is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 (S2207). More specifically, the value of the first collision type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 is compared with the first collision type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106) to determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is a big hit A4 (16 round probability variation big hit) If it is in the range of "10 to 19", it is determined that the jackpot B4 (five round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "20 to 89", it is the jackpot C4 (five round special) If it is in the range of "90, 91", it is determined that it is jackpot D4 (2-round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "92-99", it is jackpot E4 (2-round special deal). It determines (refer FIG. 106).

  In the process of S2207, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big jack A4 to E4). Further, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type, the big hit type (big hit A4 to E4) is set as the stop type. When the process of S2207 ends, the special-figure-per-table 202d1 is read out from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2208), and the process proceeds to S2213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is out (S2206: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S2209). In the process of S2209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the third symbol display device is based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As a stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is a reach before or after, a reach other than before or after, or a complete miss.

  Next, it is determined whether the special symbol is in the definite variation state from the condition of the definite variation flag 203g (S2210), and when it is determined that the definite variation state is in progress (S2210: Yes), the special figure 1 deviates from the variation pattern selection table 202d. The (probable) table 202d3 is read (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, in the process of S2210, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the definite variation state (S2210: No), the special pattern deviation table 202d2 is read out from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2212) To step S2213.

  In the process of S2213, the variation pattern is determined based on the data table read by any of the processes of S2208, S2211 or S2212 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S2213), and the process proceeds to S2214. Do.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the jackpot of a type in which the player can easily detect whether the result of the variation display of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot is off, It is configured to provide a jackpot of a type that is hard to detect. More specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed after the big hit is out, the jackpot type (special) that the variation time of the period different from the interval period of the jackpot of the second special symbol is easy to select And a jackpot type that is hard to be selected. Thereby, after the end of the special hit, the player can guess whether or not the lottery result is out by paying attention to the opening operation of the open / close door 65f1. That is, the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode can be predicted by the player before the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is notified. On the other hand, after the big hit other than the special hit is finished, it is judged from the operation of the open / close door 65f1 whether it is the open / close operation by the small hit continuous or the open / close operation by the big hit G4 or H4. It becomes difficult. In this way, depending on the jackpot type, it is not possible to know whether or not the second special symbol is included until the result of the door breakthrough mode presentation is confirmed, and the game performance of the door breakthrough mode presentation whether or not it is out It is possible to switch between easy-to-sense gameplay. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the fourth embodiment, the interval period (one second) of the jackpot of the second special symbol is longer (three seconds) if the second special symbol after the special hit falls out of the second special symbol (small hit) ) Is configured to be easy to set the change time (a ratio of about 1/3), but the change time (that is, the interval until the open / close door 65f1 is opened when it becomes out of place) is limited to this It is not a thing. It may be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the player can determine that a period different from the interval period is set. For example, a variation time of 0.1 seconds may be easily set. By configuring in this manner, since the open / close door 65f1 is opened and closed at a clearly short interval, there is a high possibility that opening and closing of the open / close door 65f1 for the player is a small hit. It can be thought. Therefore, the game can be played by paying attention to the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing door 65f1. In addition, a variable member capable of variable operation is provided separately from the open / close door 65f1, and depending on whether the variable operation of the variable member is a special hit after a special hit or a big hit other than a special hit. The configuration may be different.

  In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the pachinko machine 10 is disadvantageous for the player when the jackpot occurs in the second special symbol lottery, but for the player when the jackpot occurs in the second special symbol lottery It may apply to the pachinko machine 10 which becomes advantageous. By configuring in this manner, since the number of times that the open / close door 65f1 is opened at one second intervals after the big hit is continued, the sense of expectation for becoming a big win for the advantageous second special symbol is increased, so It is possible to make the player pay attention to the game by the operation of the open / close door 65f1.

  In the fourth embodiment, there is provided a jackpot type which is easily different between the case where the variable operation of the open / close door 65f1 is out after the jackpot is finished and the case of the jackpot, and the jackpot type which is likely to be the same variable operation. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as composition provided with a jackpot type which is easy to be different by a case of a fall and a case of a jackpot, and a jackpot type which is easy to be matched. In addition, for example, according to the jackpot type, if the special symbol lottery is dropped out, it will be a small hit (that is, the opening / closing door 65f1 will be released for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds)) the probability is different It may be configured to As a result, it is possible to play the game in anticipation that the open / close door 65f1 is not opened (that is, to be disengaged).

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, and it is easily guessed that various modification improvement is possible in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It is possible.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments and the variation thereof, the state is shifted to the disadvantageous state (normal mode) until all the drawing based on the holding balls of the second special symbol, which are executed after the big hit, end. Although it was considered as the structure which alert | reports whether it was having been by door breakthrough mode production | presentation, it is not restricted to this. Whether or not it is a holding ball of the second special symbol, the door whether or not it has transitioned to a disadvantageous state (or advantageous) within the range of lottery of a predetermined number of special symbols after the end of the big hit The notification may be made by the breakthrough mode effect. Specifically, for example, in the special variation state of the special symbol, every time it is time to draw the special symbol, it is different from the special symbol drawing, and it shifts (falls) to the low probability state without going through the big hit. The door breakthrough mode effect is applied to the pachinko machine 10 of the specification (specification in which it is more advantageous not to become the lottery result corresponding to the fall) to perform the lottery whether or not with a predetermined probability (for example, the fall probability 1/100) It is also good. That is, in the case of a jackpot transitioning to a definite change state, for example, the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed until the drawing of the special symbol 100 times after the jackpot end is completed. And if it falls to the low probability state of a special symbol within 100 times, it is good also as composition which performs the production which fails in breakthrough of a door, and if it does not fall, performs the production which succeeds in breakthrough of a door . Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the specification in which the number of lottery times in which the probability change state is set is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, 130 times after a big hit) Alternatively, the door breakthrough mode effect may be used to indicate (inform) whether the definite change state has ended. More specifically, if the jackpot during the definite change state indicates that it is advantageous to the player (performs to achieve a successful breakthrough of the door is performed), the jackpot and a predetermined number of times (130 In the case where the lot drawing has been completed, it may be configured to indicate that the player is at a disadvantage (implementation that fails to break through the door). Furthermore, in this case, the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed over all the periods in which the probability change state is set, or for some periods (for example, the number of lottery after the big hit is 125 times or more). Only the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed.

  In addition, for example, as a game state after the jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol until the jackpot next time, and the jackpot type (big hit a) that becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the lottery of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, In the pachinko machine 10 of the specification provided with at least the jackpot type (big hit b) set in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol time-shortened state until the 100) end is provided, the jackpot won After the jackpot a or the jackpot b has been made indistinguishable (difficult) from the effects etc., after the jackpot until the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times), The game state set after the previous big hit may be informed by the door breakthrough mode effect. That is, if the gaming state is a special symbol special variation state and a normal symbol time reduction state, an effect (effect of breaking the door) is suggested to indicate that the player is in an advantageous state, and the gaming state If the special symbol low probability state and the normal symbol short time state, it may be configured to execute an effect (effect of failing to break through the door) indicating that the player is in a disadvantageous state. In addition, for example, with drawing of special symbol, as well as becoming small hitting with low probability than falling out, opening and closing operation of specified winning a prize opening 65a in the case where certain probability variation big hitting (big hitting c) is decided is equal to small hitting ( The door breakthrough mode effect may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 of the specification which is the same or an operation in which the player can not distinguish the difference. That is, it is difficult to determine which lottery result is obtained by the effect, the operation of the specific winning hole 65a, and the like depending on whether it is a small hit or a big hit c. Then, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, after the lottery for the special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) is executed after becoming a small hit or a big hit c It may be That is, if the low probability state of the special symbol is maintained as a small hit, an effect (effect of failing to break through the door) is executed to indicate that the player is in a disadvantageous state, resulting in a big hit c. If it is shifted to the definite variation state of the special symbol, it may be configured to execute the effect (the effect of succeeding in the breakthrough of the door) indicating that it is advantageous to the player.

  In each of the above embodiments, the door breakthrough mode effect is used to notify whether or not the advantageous state (mode) is set, but the content notified (suggested) in the door breakthrough mode effect is not necessarily limited to the mode . For example, it may be configured to notify by door breakthrough mode effect whether or not the effect mode is changed. More specifically, for example, it may be configured to notify in the door breakthrough mode effect whether or not to develop to a highly reliable reach effect, or to progress to the next step in so-called continuous effect.

  In said each embodiment, although it was set as the structure which the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol increases to the upper limit number (4 pieces) at the time of completion | finish of jackpot, it is not restricted after completion | finish of jackpot. It is applicable if the number of holding balls of the second special symbol increases up to the upper limit number in a state different from the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). It may be configured such that the holding ball of the second special symbol has an upper limit value at the end of time or time saving state. Further, for example, a state in which a small hit is likely to occur (lottery probability is high, or a lottery condition is easily established), or a small win (in which a lottery probability is low or a lottery condition is hardly established) is provided. The configuration may be applied to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur.

  In the above embodiments, the second ball entrance 640 and the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) are provided on the right side of the game board 13, but during the big hit the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) The arrangement may be changed to an arbitrary position as long as the ball launched toward the point where it can enter the second entrance 640 as well. In addition, the ball hit towards the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) during the jackpot was configured to be difficult to enter the first ball entrance 64, but during the jackpot the first ball entrance 64 The ball may be configured to be able to enter the ball.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is a coin, a medal, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  All or some of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (playfulness in which it is more advantageous not to have a pending party)
A first ball entering means disposed at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction is likely to enter the ball, and the first discrimination information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means The first discrimination information acquiring means to acquire, the first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means, and the first direction are different. The second discrimination information is based on the second ball entering means disposed at a position where the game ball fired in the second direction is likely to enter the ball and the game ball entered the second ball entering means Second discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring, second discrimination means for executing second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means, and the second discrimination information acquiring means After the second discrimination information is acquired, the second discrimination information is acquired based on the acquired second discrimination information. Discrimination information storage means capable of storing the second discrimination information with a predetermined number of information as the upper limit until the second discrimination is executed, and a position at which the game ball fired in the second direction is easy to enter And a variable ball entry means that can be changed to a first state in which the game ball easily enters the ball and a second state in which ball entry is more difficult than the first state, and the game ball in the variable ball entry means The variable entering ball based on the result of determination as a result of discrimination by the privilege giving means for giving a predetermined privilege based on having entered the ball, the first discrimination means, or the second discrimination means A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times, and a first game state and the first game state as a game state after execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is completed. 1) Second game which is more advantageous for the player than 1 game state The game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least the state, and the game state setting means is more than the specific determination result by the first determination means It is characterized in that the one that results in the specific determination result by the second determination means has a higher ratio of setting the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is finished. Game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first ball entry means is disposed at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is likely to enter the ball, and based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means. The first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition unit. The second ball entry means is disposed at a position where game balls launched in a second direction different from the first direction are likely to enter, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means. The second determination is executed by the second determination unit based on the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition unit. After the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means, until the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information is executed, the second discrimination information is determined by the discrimination information storage means. The predetermined number of information is stored as the upper limit. The game ball fired in the second direction is a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball easily enters the ball and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. It is placed at a position where it is easy to do. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, a predetermined bonus is awarded by the bonus award means. A variable game is executed by the variable game execution means in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times based on the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means being a specific determination result. . Among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as a gaming state after execution of the variable game by the variable gaming execution means is ended The game states from 1 to 1 are set by the game state setting means. The first determination result as the game state after execution of the variable game is finished by the game state setting means is more the result of the specific determination result by the second determination means, rather than a specific determination result by the first determination means The rate of setting is higher.

  Thus, when the game ball is fired in the second direction to obtain a predetermined benefit during execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the second discrimination information is stored. . If a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information, the rate at which the first gaming state is set to a lower degree of advantage than the second gaming state is high, so In the second determination based on the second determination information, it is possible to cause the player to play a game expecting that a specific determination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that novel game characteristics can be realized.

  In the gaming machine A1, a plurality of at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which game balls are less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern, as variable patterns of the variable ball entry means Variable pattern setting means for setting any one of the variable patterns, wherein the variable pattern setting means is more than the second variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means. The rate at which the first variable pattern is set is high, and the rate at which the second variable pattern is set is higher than that of the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means. A game machine A2 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is less likely to enter the ball than the first variable pattern as the variable patterns of the variable ball entry means Is set by the variable pattern setting means. When the determination by the first determination means results in a specific determination result, the rate at which the first variable pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means becomes higher than that of the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the first variable pattern.

  Thereby, when it becomes a specific determination result by the determination by the second determination means, it becomes easy to set the second variable pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the variable ball entry means, so during the execution of the variable game In the second determination based on the second determination information stored in the above, there is an effect that it is possible to more strongly expect that a specific determination result will not be obtained.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, the first variable pattern and the game ball in the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern The game ball is provided with variable pattern setting means for setting any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern in which it is difficult to enter the ball, and a period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern It is constituted by a period at least longer than a period until the second discrimination information of the predetermined number of information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means when it is continuously ejected in the second direction. A game machine A3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable entering means variable pattern, the first variable pattern and the second variable that the game ball is difficult to enter the variable entering means than the first variable pattern A plurality of variable patterns including at least a pattern are set by the variable pattern setting unit. During a period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, when the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction, the second determination information acquisition means acquires a second determination information of a predetermined number of information Period of at least a longer period than

  Thereby, during execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, if the player continues to fire the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined benefit, the second game is executed at least a predetermined number of pieces of information. Discrimination information of is acquired. Therefore, after the end of the variable game, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed every time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player play a game in expectation that the second determination of the upper limit number of times does not all result in a specific determination result.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination unit is executed prior to the first determination by the first determination unit. Gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determining means is executed with priority over the first determination by the first determining means. Even if the game ball enters the first ball entry means with the second discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, it is possible to suppress the execution of the first discrimination. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination can be made to pay attention.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first flow path is disposed at a position where the game ball fired in the second direction can reach, and the reached game ball is provided with the second ball entering means And a second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means, including a sorting means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first flow path provided with the second ball entry means and the second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means Because the sorting means for sorting the game balls is disposed at a position where the game balls fired in the second direction can reach, the flow-down direction of the game balls fired in the second direction may be biased. There is an effect that it can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine A5, a gaming machine A6 characterized in that the sorting means sorts gaming balls alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A5, the gaming ball is alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means, so A ball can be alternately entered into the second entry means and the variable entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the game ball fired in the second direction is biased to the second ball entering means or the variable ball entering means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first position where the gaming ball can easily enter the first ball entry means, and the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means as compared to the first position. The game machine further includes variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to ball, and variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable means, wherein the first game state is determined by the variable means using the variable control means. The second game state is characterized in that the variable means is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than the first game state. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first position where the gaming ball can easily enter the first ball entry means, and the first position compared to the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first gaming state, the variable control means is less likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means, and in the second gaming state, the variable control means is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than the first gaming state. .

  Thereby, in the first gaming state, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, so the game ball can easily enter the first ball entering means. Therefore, in the first gaming state, since the game can be played more efficiently, there is an effect that it is possible to play the game with further expectation of becoming the first gaming state.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the first gaming state is set such that the probability that the specific discrimination result will be the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means is set to a first probability. In the second gaming state, the probability that the specific determination result is determined by the first determination means and the second determination means is set to a second probability lower than the first probability. A game machine A8 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first gaming state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means and the second determination means is set as the first probability. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the probability that the first determination unit and the second determination unit make a determination as a specific determination result is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

  Thereby, in the first gaming state, the probability of becoming a specific determination result is higher than in the second gaming state, so that after the variable game ends, the variable game is more likely to be executed again with a relatively small number of determinations. Therefore, in the first gaming state, it can be expected to acquire more predetermined benefits in a relatively short time, so that the interest of the player in playing the game can be improved.

<Feature B group> (A specific effect is executed using a jackpot ending period and a reserve digestion period)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, benefit game execution means for performing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result being a specific discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the benefits A plurality of games including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first gaming state as a gaming state after execution of the bonus game by the game execution means is finished A game state setting means for setting one game state from among the states, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means, and predetermined during execution of the bonus game Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the period until the end of the bonus game, and the end of the dynamic display of the one or more identification information executed after the end of the bonus game A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a period and the specific effect can indicate to the player whether or not the gaming state after the specific effect is over is the second gaming state A game machine B1 characterized in that it is an effect.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination. Implemented by means. A plurality of games including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state after execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is finished Among the states, one game state is set by the game state setting means. The identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A dynamic display of a period until the end of the bonus game and one or more identification information to be executed after the end of the bonus game, based on the fact that a predetermined condition established in advance during execution of the bonus game is satisfied. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in the period until the end of. The specific effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the gaming state after the specific effect ends is the second gaming state.

  In this way, the specific effect can be executed over the period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of the dynamic display of one or more identification information, so the period until the bonus game is simply ended As compared with the case where the specific effect is performed in the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information of 1 or 1, the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is set is set to the second gaming state, the specific effect execution means is based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. A game machine B2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, when the second gaming state is set to the second gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, the specific effect is established based on the establishment of the specific condition. Since is performed by the specific effect execution means, the second gaming state is suggested in the specific effect unless a specific determination result is obtained during execution of the specific effect and transition to the first gaming state is made. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game expecting that a specific determination result is not obtained during execution of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, on the basis of a predetermined specific trigger, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means Discrimination information storage means that can be stored with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit until the discrimination condition for the acquired discrimination information is satisfied, and stored in the discrimination information storage means based on the satisfaction of the specific condition Based on the determination means for determining whether or not the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result is included in the determination information, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined based on the determination result by the determination means. And an effect mode determining means for executing the specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. Game machine B3 to.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on a predetermined specific trigger, discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is discrimination with respect to the acquired discrimination information Until the condition is satisfied, it is stored by the discrimination information storage means with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the determination means determines whether or not the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result is included in the determination information stored in the determination information storage means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determination means. The specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect executing means.

  As a result, since the determination result by the determination means can be determined in advance, there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode according to the result of determination actually performed by the determination means.

  In the gaming machine B3, as a type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means, a first bonus game in which a game state after execution is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, It comprises a type determination means for determining the type of one of a plurality of types of benefit games including at least a second benefit game in which a game state after execution is ended is set to the second game state, the determination means It is determined whether the determination information corresponding to the first bonus game is included in the determination information stored in the determination information storage means, and the effect mode determination means determines the determination Based on that it is determined that the determination information corresponding to the first bonus game is included by the means, a presentation style that suggests that the gaming state after the specific presentation is the first gaming state And characterized in that to determine the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exerted. That is, as the type of the bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means, the first bonus game in which the gaming state after execution is set to the first gaming state by the game state setting means, and after the execution is ended The type determination means determines one type from among a plurality of types of bonus games including at least a second benefit game in which the game state is set to the second game mode. It is determined by the determination means whether or not the determination information corresponding to the first bonus game is included in the determination information stored in the determination information storage means. Based on the determination that the determination means includes the determination information corresponding to the first bonus game, the effect mode that indicates that the game state after the specific effect is the first game state is the effect It is determined by an aspect determining means.

  In this way, it is possible to provide a novel game characteristic in which the game is performed in anticipation that the first bonus game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a gaming machine B5 characterized in that the specific effect is set as a specific period which is predetermined as an effect period regardless of the effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a specific period set in advance independently of the effect mode is set as the effect period of the specific effect, so the effect period is long Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the result of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the result of the specific effect until the end.

  In the gaming machine B5, a display means for displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the above described dynamic display execution means Dynamic display period determination means for determining the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and the specific period is for the benefit game after the specific condition is satisfied Is determined by the dynamic display period determining means when all of the determinations by the determining means for a predetermined number of times until the end of the process ends and the determination by the determining means are different from the specific determination result. A game machine B6 characterized by being a sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. Dynamic display of identification information indicating the determination result by the determination unit is executed by the dynamic display execution unit. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display period is determined when the period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of the bonus game and the discrimination by the discrimination means of the predetermined number of times which are all different from the discrimination result of the particular discrimination result A sum with a specific number of dynamic display periods determined by the means is set as the specific period.

  As a result, since the specific effect can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for the specific number of times is ended, there is an effect that the specific effect can be ended well.

  In the gaming machine B6, the dynamic display period determination means determines that at least the specific period ends when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means within the specific number of times after the end of the bonus game. A game machine B7 characterized in that a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of is determined as the dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, at least after the end of the special period, when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining means within the specific number of times, Since the period more than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, when it becomes a specific determination result by the determination within the specific number of times, the bonus game is performed before the specific period ends. Can be suppressed. Therefore, by starting the bonus game before the specific effect ends, it is possible to suppress that the result of the specific effect is known in advance, so that it is possible to pay attention to the specific effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, an expectation degree suggestion effect execution means is provided which executes an effect indicating an expectation for the second gaming state being suggested by the specific effect during execution of the bonus game. A game machine B8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines B1 to B7, a production that indicates an expectation for the second gaming state to be suggested by the specific production during execution of the bonus game is an expectation degree suggestion rendering execution means As a result, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the effect mode during execution of the bonus game and the specific effect are a series of effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game while the bonus game is being executed.

<Feature C group> (makes it difficult to determine from the operation of the attacker whether or not a pending run occurs)
A bonus ball entry means to which a predetermined bonus is given based on the game ball entering the ball, a first position where the game ball can pitch into the bonus ball entry means, and a game than the first position Based on the variable means that changes the ball to the second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the first determination result by the determination by the determination means First variable control means for controlling the variable means so as to change in the first variable mode, and based on the fact that the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means And a game state setting means capable of setting a game state different from the game state at the time the judgment is executed, and a specific number of times based on the judgment by the judgment means being the second judgment result All determinations by the determination means are the The variable means is controlled to be variable in a second variable mode including at least a specific variable mode which looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode which is executed when the determination result is A second variable control means, and a game machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, a predetermined benefit is provided by the benefit entering means, and the first position where the game ball can enter the bonus entering means, and The variable means is variable to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Discrimination is executed by the discriminator based on the establishment of the discriminant condition, and based on the fact that the discriminant by the discriminator makes a specific discriminant result, the first variable control means is made variable in the first variable mode. Controlled by Differentiated from the first variable aspect of the specific number of times to be executed when all the discrimination by the specific number of times of the determination results in the first discrimination result based on the second discrimination result as the discrimination by the discrimination means. The second variable control means controls the variable means so as to change the variable means in a second variable mode that at least includes the specific variable mode which makes it difficult to look hard.

  This makes it difficult to distinguish from the variable aspect of the variable means whether it is the first determination result or the second determination result, so it is possible to determine whether a different gaming state has been set or not There is an effect that it can be made difficult for the person to distinguish.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming state setting means can set one gaming state out of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. The rate at which the second gaming state is set is set higher than the rate at which the first gaming state is set when the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means. A game machine C2 characterized by being

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the rate at which the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means is set higher than the rate at which the first gaming state is set.

  As a result, when the second determination result is obtained, the disadvantageous second game state is easily set, so that it is possible to perform the game in anticipation of the first determination result.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a ratio at which the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining means is set to be higher than a ratio at which other determination results are obtained.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the ratio of the first determination result by the determination by the determination means is set to be higher than the ratio of the other determination results. There is a high probability that the first determination result will be made continuously over the number of times. Therefore, even when the second discrimination result is obtained and the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode, it can be thought that the first discrimination result may be continuous for a specific number of times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not different gaming states have been set.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the discrimination means executes discrimination when any one of a first discrimination condition and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is satisfied. The ratio of setting the first gaming state is set to a high value when the second determination result is obtained based on determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition. A game machine characterized in that the ratio for setting the second game state which is more disadvantageous than the first game state is set high when the second judgment result is obtained by the judgment based on establishment. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination means executes discrimination when either of the first discrimination condition and the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is satisfied. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the ratio at which the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means is set high. On the other hand, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the ratio at which the second game state, which is more disadvantageous than the first game state, is set is set high.

  Thus, when the second determination result is obtained based on the determination of the first determination condition, the first game condition having a higher degree of advantage than the second game condition is easily set, so the first determination condition is The game can be played in anticipation of being established. Therefore, when the determination by the determination means is executed, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the determination condition which has triggered the execution of the determination.

  In the gaming machine C4, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the second judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means, and the bonus entering means is more than the second variable mode. A game machine C5 comprising a third variable control means for controlling the variable means so as to be variable in a third variable mode in which the game ball easily enters the ball.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4, the second discrimination result is the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, rather than the second variable mode. The third variable control means is controlled by the third variable control means so that the variable means is variable in the third variable mode in which the game ball easily enters the bonus entering means, so that the second determination is made based on the determination of the first determination condition. It is possible to further increase the degree of advantage when it results. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play the game in expectation of the establishment of the first determination condition.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the first ball entering means disposed at a position where the gaming ball fired in the first direction is likely to enter the ball, and the gaming ball fired in the second direction different from the first direction A second ball entering means disposed at a position where it is easy to enter the ball, and the first determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, The second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the bonus ball entering means enters the game ball fired in the second direction. A game machine C6 characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to ball.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exerted. That is, while the first ball entry means is disposed at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is likely to enter the ball, the second ball is placed at a location where the game ball launched in the second direction is likely to enter. A ball entry means and a benefit ball entry means are provided. While the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, the second determination condition is based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means Is established.

  As a result, when the bonus entry means is changed to the first position, the game ball enters the second entry means when the game is fired in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined benefit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition can be easily performed after the benefit entry means is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine C6, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means A game machine C7 comprising: discriminative information storage means having at least a predetermined number of information as the upper limit, and capable of storing at least the discrimination by said discrimination means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is It is stored at least by the discrimination information storage unit until the discrimination by the discrimination unit is executed with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit.

  Thus, when the ball entering to the second ball entering means is detected in a situation where the discrimination by the discriminating means can not start, discrimination information used for discrimination can be stored by the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that the ball entering to the 2nd ball entering means becomes useless.

  In any one of the gaming machines C4 to C7, the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is performed prior to the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. A game machine C8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C4 to C7, the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is from the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition Is executed with priority, so that when the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is performed, the result of the determination can be focused.

<Feature D group> (A special winning start is likely to occur during a big hit, but a configuration that becomes difficult to occur during normal times)
First determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a first determination condition, second determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the first determination Means, or a benefit game execution means for executing a benefit game advantageous to the player based on the result of the specific determination by the determination by the second determination means, and the benefit game executed by the benefit game execution means The type determination of one type of bonus game among a plurality of types including at least a first benefit game and a second benefit game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first benefit game is determined The first state in which the second determination condition is easily established is set based on the determination result by the means, the first determination means, or the second determination means that the specific determination result is obtained. End condition is And a state setting unit configured to set a second state in which the second judgment condition is less likely to be satisfied compared to the first state based on the standing state, and the type determination unit is configured by the second judgment unit. It is characterized in that the ratio at which the second bonus game is determined is higher when the specific determination result is obtained by the first determination unit than when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the determination is performed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. Be done. Based on the fact that the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means results in the specific determination result, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the score game execution means. The type of the bonus game to be executed by the bonus game executing means is a type among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first bonus game. The type of one bonus game is determined by the determination means. The state setting means sets a first state in which the second judgment condition is easily established, based on the fact that the first judgment means or the second judgment means makes a specific judgment result. On the other hand, based on the satisfaction of the termination condition of the bonus game, the state setting means sets a second state in which the second judgment condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state. The type determination means is configured such that the rate at which the second bonus game is determined is higher when the determination by the first determination means results in the specific determination result than when the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result. It is configured.

  Thereby, it can be suppressed that the second determination condition is established in a state other than during the execution of the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to limit the opportunity for the first benefit game having a low degree of advantage to be performed.

  Discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on establishment of the second discrimination condition in the gaming machine D1, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means And a discrimination information storage unit that stores a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination unit.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the second determination condition, determination information to be used for determination by the second determination unit is acquired by the determination information acquisition unit. Until the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, the discrimination information storage means stores the predetermined information number as the upper limit.

  Thereby, when the second determination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the determination by the second determination unit is performed, a plurality of pieces of determination information acquired according to the formation of the plurality of second determination conditions. Is stored by the discrimination information storage means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the discrimination is not executed although the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine D2, the second determination means is acquired by the determination information acquisition means during execution of the bonus game, and after the end of the bonus game based on the determination information stored in the determination information storage means. A game machine D3 characterized by performing discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2, the second discriminating means determines the benefit based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means during the execution of the bonus game and stored in the discrimination information storage means. Since the determination is performed after the end of the game, it is possible to concentrate the opportunity for the determination by the second determination means after the end of the bonus game. Therefore, after the end of the bonus game, it is possible to perform the game in anticipation that the determination by the second determination means does not result in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, an entering means in which the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entering of the gaming ball, and a first position where the gaming ball is difficult to enter the entering means The variable means can be changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the variable means can be changed to the second position where the game ball can enter the ball more easily than the first position, and the specific determination condition is satisfied. The variable means changes to the second position based on the specific judging means for judging whether the position is to be changed into two positions and the fact that it is judged by the specific judging means that the first position is to be changed to the second position. And the variable control means is controlled in the second state in comparison with the case where it is determined that the variable means is variable in the second state. Can change the variable means Gaming machine D4 which is better when it is determined that the cause, wherein said varying means is used to control such a period for varying longer in the second position.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entering means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is variable at the second position. Based on the fact that the specific determination condition is satisfied, it is determined by the specific determination means whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means so as to change to the second position based on the fact that the specific judgment means judges that the first position should be changed to the second position. The variable means is in the second position when it is determined that the variable means is variable in the second state than when it is determined that the variable means is variable in the second state. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes long.

  Thereby, the game state can be made easier to enter the ball entry means in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, in the first state, the second determination condition can be more easily established than in the second state.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, an entering means in which the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entering of the gaming ball, and a first position where the gaming ball is difficult to enter the entering means The variable means can be changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the variable means can be changed to the second position where the game ball can enter the ball more easily than the first position, and the specific determination condition is satisfied. The variable means changes to the second position based on the specific judging means for judging whether the position is to be changed into two positions and the fact that it is judged by the specific judging means that the first position is to be changed to the second position. Of the first state is more likely to be shorter than the second state in the period from the start of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means to the end of the first state. A game machine D5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entering means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is variable at the second position. Based on the fact that the specific determination condition is satisfied, it is determined by the specific determination means whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means so as to change to the second position based on the fact that the specific judgment means judges that the first position should be changed to the second position. The first state is configured so that the period from the start of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means to the end is shorter than in the second state.

  As a result, in the first state, the period required for the identification determining means to determine the same number of times is shorter than in the second state. Therefore, since the variable means can have the opportunity of being varied to the second position more times, it is possible to easily enter the game ball in the first state.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a ball entering means provided in a specific flow path and having the second determination condition established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, and the gaming ball does not flow down the specific flow path And the opening / closing means is set to the open state based on the first state. An opening / closing control unit configured to set the closed state based on the second state; and a game machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the ball entry means is provided in the specific flow path in which the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball. The opening / closing means is variably changed between a closed state in which the game ball is closed so as to make it difficult for the game ball to flow down, and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. The opening / closing means is set in the open state by the opening / closing control means based on the first state, and the opening / closing means is set in the closed state by the opening / closing control means based on the second state. .

  As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the second determination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

  In the gaming machine D6, the opening / closing means is configured to be able to hold a specified number of gaming balls upstream of the opening / closing means when the closed state is set. Machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, it is possible to hold a specific number of gaming balls upstream of the opening and closing means when the opening and closing means is set to the closed state Since the game ball is set to the open state, the game ball which has been parked can be made to enter the ball entry means. Therefore, in the first state in which the open state is set, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily established.

<Feature E group> (includes information according to the remaining number of changes until the end of the specific effect in the change pattern command from main to sub)
A gaming machine comprising: display means capable of displaying an effect mode; main control means for performing main control relating to a game; and slave control means for performing control relating to a game based on a command output from the main control means. The main control means executes the advantageous game advantageous to the player based on the determination means performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result A bonus game executing means, a dynamic display executing means for executing a dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of discrimination by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means Dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time, information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and information corresponding to the dynamic display time are different Command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least specific information to the slave control means, the slave control means including the dynamic display time output by the command output means Command receiving means for receiving a command, dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time based on reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means, and predetermined specific conditions Specific effect executing means for executing on the display means a specific effect that can be executed over one or more of the dynamic display times based on the establishment of the specific effect included in the dynamic display time command Specific effect end determination means for determining whether or not to end the specific effect based on the information of the specific effect, and the specific effect by the specific effect end determination means During the period until the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means is ended based on the dynamic display time command used for the judgment, triggered by the fact that it is judged to be ended, A game machine E1 comprising: specific effect end means for ending the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and it is advantageous for the player based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. The bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. Dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A dynamic display time command including at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is determined by the command output means It is output to the slave control means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display time is output based on the dynamic display time command output by the command output means being received by the command receiving means and the dynamic display time command being received by the command receiving means. It is specified by the display time specifying means. Based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is established, a specific effect that can be executed over one or more dynamic display times is executed by the specific effect execution means on the display means. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, it is determined by the specific effect end determination unit whether or not to end the specific effect. The dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means is ended based on the dynamic display time command used for the judgment when the specific effect end judging means judges that the specific effect is ended. In the meantime, the specific effect is ended by the specific effect main hot water amount means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the specific effect can be suitably ended.

  In the gaming machine E1, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be ended by the specific effect end determining means, the specific based on the information according to the determination result by the determining means included in the dynamic display time command A game machine E2 comprising effect mode determination means for determining an effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the effect end means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, when it is determined that the specific effect is ended by the specific effect end determining means, according to the determination result by the determining means included in the dynamic display time command Based on the information, since the effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining means until the specific effect is ended by the specific effect end means, the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the determining means. . Therefore, it is effective in the ability to set suitably the production | presentation aspect of a specific production.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the slave control means includes an insertion determining means for determining the turning on of the power to the gaming machine, and the dynamic display time command included when the turning on of the power is determined by the entering determining means. On the basis of the specific information, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is being performed when the power of the gaming machine is cut off. A game machine E3 comprising: post-input effect execution means for executing the specific effect based on having been determined to be inside.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, in the slave control means, the turning-on of the power to the gaming machine is determined by the turning-off determination means, and the turning-off determination means determines that the power is turned on. In addition, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, it is determined by the disconnection time determination means whether or not the point in time when the power of the gaming machine is shut off is during the execution of the specific effect. The specific effect is executed by the effect execution means after input based on the fact that the specific time is being determined by the interruption time determination means.

  Thereby, even if the power is shut off during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect can be resumed, so that the effect mode is different before and after the power is shut off, and the player is prevented from being confused It has the effect of being able to

  In the game machine E3, a game machine E4 characterized in that the specific effect end means is for ending the specific effect executed by the effect execution means after insertion.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E3, since the specific effect executed by the effect execution means after insertion is terminated by the specific effect ending means, the power supply of the gaming machine is in progress during the specific effect. Even in the case of being shut off, there is an effect that the specific effect can be suitably ended.

  In the gaming machine E4, a gaming machine E5 characterized in that the specific effect execution means sets a specific period predetermined as the effect period of the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E5, a specific period predetermined by the specific effect executing means is set as the effect period of the specific effect, so simple processing is performed when setting the specific effect. There is an effect that it can be set by

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the main control means acquires discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquiring means And the command output unit stores the determined information in the determined information storage unit, the determination information storing unit being capable of storing at least the predetermined information number as the upper limit to be used for the determination by the determination unit. The information number command including information according to the information number of the discrimination information being outputted is outputted to the slave control means, and the specific effect execution means is configured to execute the discrimination information of the discrimination information included in the information number command. A game machine E6 characterized in that the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information the number of times equal to or less than the number of information.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information acquisition means acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition. Discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored at least in the discrimination information storage means until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit. An information number command including information according to the information number of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is output by the command output means to the sub control means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means over the dynamic display of the identification information of the number of times equal to or less than the information number of the determination information included in the information number command.

  Thereby, the specific effect can be executed within the range equal to or less than the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, so the identification is performed despite the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed. There is an effect that it can control that a production continues.

  In the gaming machine E6, the information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information is from when the specific condition is satisfied until all discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is completed, A game machine E7 characterized by comprising information corresponding to the number of remaining pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E6, all discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is satisfied, in the information according to the information number of the discrimination information Since the information corresponding to the number of remaining determination information stored in the determination information storage means is stored until the end of the process, the specific effect is more reliably stored in the determination information storage means There is an effect that execution can be performed within the range equal to or less than the number of pieces of discrimination information.

<Feature F group> (varies the easiness of execution of the special figure lottery on the disadvantage side according to the winning symbol)
A first ball entering means disposed at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction is likely to enter the ball, and the first discrimination information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means First discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring, first discrimination means for executing first discrimination using the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means, and the first direction Second discrimination information based on the second ball entering means disposed at a position where game balls fired in different second directions are likely to enter the ball, and the gaming ball having entered the second ball entering means Using the second discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring the second discrimination information and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means, the second discrimination which is more likely to be a disadvantageous discrimination result than the first discrimination. A second determination unit to execute, and the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition unit Is advantageous for the player based on the determination result by the determination information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of information as the upper limit, the first determination means, or the second determination means. It is more advantageous to fire the game ball in the first direction than the second direction at least for a predetermined period as a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game and a type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means. One of the above-mentioned bonus games from among a plurality of types including an easy first bonus game and a second bonus game in which it is more advantageous to fire the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction during the predetermined period. And a type determination means for determining the type of the game machine F1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that shifts to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of per-classes having different numbers of rounds, and some are trying to improve the persuasiveness by varying the game value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417). Also, among conventional gaming machines, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, it is advantageous to make the gaming state given after hitting different or to make the number of winning balls obtainable in each round different, etc. Some have a difference in degree. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first ball entering means is disposed at a position where it is easy for the game balls fired in the first direction to enter. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entering means, and the first discrimination information acquired by the first information acquiring means is used. The first determination is performed by the first determination means. The second ball entering means is disposed at a position where game balls launched in a second direction different from the first direction are likely to enter. Second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball having entered the second ball entering means. Using the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means, the second discrimination means executes the second discrimination which is more likely to be a discrimination result that is more disadvantageous than the first discrimination. The second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit. Based on the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means that the specific determination result is obtained, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. As a type of bonus game to be executed by bonus game execution means, it is easier to fire the game ball in the first direction than the second direction at least in the predetermined period, and the first bonus game is more advantageous than the first direction in the predetermined period The type of one bonus game is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including the second bonus game in which it is more advantageous to launch the game ball in the second direction.

  As a result, it is difficult to execute the second discrimination that is more likely to be a disadvantageous discrimination result in the first benefit game, which is advantageous by firing the gaming ball in the first direction, so the first benefit game and the second benefit The difference in the degree of advantage with the game can be increased. Therefore, since it can be expected that the first bonus game is determined by the type determination means, when a specific determination result is obtained, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the bonus game and to play the game There is.

  In the gaming machine F1, the gaming ball launched in the first direction is disposed at a position where it is easy to enter the ball, and the first possible state in which the gaming ball can enter the ball and the one in which the gaming ball can not enter the ball The variable ball entering means and the game ball launched in the second direction are disposed at positions where it is easy to enter the ball, and the state where the game ball can enter the ball and the state where the game ball can not enter the ball can be varied 2) Variable ball entering means, and benefit giving means for giving a predetermined benefit based on the game ball having entered the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means, The first benefit game is more easily changed to a state in which the first variable ball entry means can enter the ball than the second variable ball entry means, and the second benefit game is the first bonus A game machine characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a ball entry enabled state than a game. 2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first variable ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction can easily enter, and the first variable ball entering means capable of changing into the state where the game ball can enter and the game ball difficult to enter It is done. A second variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction is likely to enter the ball, and a state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a state in which the game ball can not enter the ball are difficult There is. Based on the game ball having entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, a predetermined bonus is awarded by the bonus award means. In the first bonus game, the first variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state in which the first variable ball entry means can enter the ball than the second variable ball entry means. In the second benefit game, the second variable entering means can be more easily changed to a state where it can enter the ball than the first benefit game.

  Thereby, during the execution of the bonus game, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the launched game ball enters the first variable entering means or the second variable entering means, and the game can be played. is there.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game, the first gaming state and the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state 1 out of a plurality Game state setting means for setting the game state of the first game state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the determination result by the second determination means being the specific determination result A gaming machine F3 characterized in that a ratio set as a later gaming state is higher than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, as the game state after the end of the bonus game, the first game state and the second game state including at least the second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state is the game state of 1 It is set by the setting means. In the first gaming state, the ratio set as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the determination result by the second determination means being a specific determination result is higher than the second gaming state It is configured to be

  In this way, it is possible to realize the novel game characteristic that the game is played in anticipation that the specific determination result is not obtained when the determination by the second determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine F3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state at a ratio at which the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the first benefit game or the second benefit game is over. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the ratio is higher than

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F3, the ratio in which the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game is over is the first gaming state Since it is configured to be higher than the set ratio, the second determination executed based on the fact that the game ball has been fired in the second direction in a predetermined period results in a specific determination result, and the first gaming state Can make the player think that he wants to avoid being set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play the game in anticipation that the specific determination result can not be obtained in the second determination after the end of the second benefit game.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, a suggestion effect executing means for performing suggestion effect suggesting a decision result by the first judging means or the second judging means, and the suggestion executed by the suggestion effect executing means As the effect, when the first bonus game is determined by the type determination means, either the first suggested effect or the second suggested effect different from the first suggested effect is determined, and the type determination means A gaming machine F5 comprising: suggestion effect determining means for determining the first suggestion effect when the second bonus game is determined.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the suggestion effect indicating the discrimination result by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. When the first bonus game is determined by the type determination means as the suggestion effect performed by the suggestion effect execution means, either the first indication effect or the second suggestion effect different from the first indication effect is suggested It is determined by the effect determination means. On the other hand, when the second bonus game is determined by the type determination means, the first suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination means.

  Thereby, when the second suggestion effect is executed, it is determined that it is the first bonus game, and therefore, the game can be played in expectation of the second suggestion effect being executed as the suggestion effect. It has the effect of In addition, since the first suggestion effect may be executed even in the first bonus game, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the game can be played in anticipation of being the first bonus game. It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine F5, when the first suggestion effect is executed based on the fact that the first bonus game has been determined by the type determination means, the suggestion effect execution means performs the first suggestion effect after the termination. A game machine F6 characterized by performing a second suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, when the first suggestion effect is executed based on the determination of the first bonus game by the type determination means, after the end of the first suggestion effect Since the second suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect executing means, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the game is performed in hopes that the second suggestion effect will be executed after the end of the first suggestion effect. It has the effect of being able to

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, when the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction during the predetermined period, the second determination information acquiring unit causes the second information to be at least the predetermined number of information. It is a period of the length for which the discrimination information of is acquired, and a game machine F7.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, it becomes a second bonus game, and continues to fire the gaming ball in the second direction in a predetermined period to the discrimination information storage means Since the second determination information of the predetermined number of information which is the upper limit is stored, there is an effect that the second determination of the number of times corresponding to the upper limit number can be executed after the end of the second benefit game.

  In the gaming machine F7, the gaming balls fired in the second direction are disposed at positions where it is easy to enter, and can be changed to a first state in which the gaming balls can enter and a second state in which the gaming balls are difficult to enter The game ball enters the second variable ball entering means, the variable control means for varying the state of the second variable ball entering means into the first state in the predetermined period, and the second variable ball entering means The second ball entering means is provided with a benefit giving means for giving a predetermined benefit based on the ball and a position where the game ball fired in the second direction is reachable and the reached game ball is reached A game machine F8 comprising: a sorting means for sorting the first flow path and the second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exerted. A second variable ball entry means that can be varied between a first state where the game ball can enter the ball and a second state where the game ball can not enter the ball at a position where the game ball fired in the second direction is likely to enter. Is arranged. The state of the second variable ball entry means is varied to the first state for a predetermined period by the variable control means. Based on the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means, a predetermined bonus is awarded by the bonus award means. The first flow path in which the game ball is provided with the second ball entry means and the second flow path in which the second variable ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball fired in the second direction can reach The distribution means for allocating to either is arranged.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress that the flow-down direction of the game ball fired in the second direction can be biased.

  In the game machine F8, a game machine F9 characterized in that the distribution means distributes game balls alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8, the gaming ball fired in the second direction in the predetermined period in the second bonus game is used as the second entering means and the second variable entering means. You can enter the ball alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress that the game ball fired in the second direction is biased to the second ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means.

<Feature G group> (informing the jackpot type based on having won V)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, benefit game execution means for performing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result being a specific discrimination result by the discrimination means, and game ball Is a variable that can be changed between a ball entering means capable of entering the ball, a first position where game balls can be entered into the ball entering means, and a second position where ball entering is more difficult than the first position Variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition during execution of the bonus game, and the bonus game is ended As a later game state, when the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game, a first game state advantageous to the player is set, and the game enters the ball during the execution of the bonus game If the game ball does not enter the means, the first game state is Also, the first bonus game and the first bonus game for the player than the first bonus game, as a game state setting means for setting a second game state disadvantageous to the player, and a type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means In the case where at least the first bonus game or the second bonus game is determined by the type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least the advantageous second bonus game, and the type determining means A suggestion effect execution means that can be executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the suggestion means indicating the determined type of the bonus game to the entry means. Machine G1.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with display devices such as liquid crystal display devices are known. In this conventional game machine, a symbol variation display is performed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, whereby a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the symbols, and the interest of the game is improved by executing various kinds of interest effects (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A 2003-325886). In addition, among such conventional type gaming machines, at the time of winning a hit, the gaming machine does not notify the gaming state after the hitting, but also the gaming machine that executes effects that suggest the playing state after the hitting during the hitting state. Are known. However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, there is a problem that the remaining winning games become monotonous after the effect indicating the gaming state after the winning is executed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the player by the bonus game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination. An advantageous bonus game is executed. The variable means is variable at a first position where the game ball can enter the ball into the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable control means changes the second position from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition during execution of the bonus game. As a game state after the end of the bonus game, when the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game, the first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the ball entering means during execution of the bonus game, the game state setting means sets a second game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As a type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means, there is a type 1 out of a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. It is determined by the type determination means. When at least the first bonus game or the second bonus game is determined by the type determining means, the game ball enters the ball entering means by the effect effect suggesting means that suggests the determined type of bonus game. To be executed on the basis of

  Thereby, even after the game ball enters the ball entry means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is determined, the type of bonus game suggested by the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means is noted. Can play a game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game becoming monotonous after entering the game ball into the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine G1, the determination means performs a first determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition as the determination condition, and a second determination that is different from the first determination condition And second determination means for performing a second determination based on satisfaction of the condition, wherein the type determination means is the specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination means. Determine the type of one of the plurality of types including at least the first bonus game and the second bonus game as the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the second game Of the first bonus game and the second bonus game as the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the result of the specific Third bonus hard to enter the game ball into The type of 1 is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a trick, and the first benefit game is a second one for a predetermined period after the end of the benefit game than the second benefit game. A game machine G2 characterized in that discrimination is facilitated.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the first discrimination means executes the first discrimination in the discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The second determination is executed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A plurality of bonus game types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game by the type determination means as the types of bonus games to be executed based on the result of the specific determination in the first determination by the first determination means One of the types is determined. On the other hand, during the execution of the bonus game than the first bonus game and the second bonus game, as a type of bonus game to be executed based on the result of the specific determination in the second determination by the second determination means From the plurality of types including at least the third bonus game that is difficult to enter the ball entering means, one type is determined by the type determining means. In the first benefit game, the second determination is more easily performed in a predetermined period after the end of the benefit game than in the second benefit game.

  Thereby, when the first benefit game is over, the disadvantageous second determination is easily performed in the predetermined period, so it is more strongly expected that the second benefit game is determined when the specific determination result is obtained. It can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play the game paying attention to the type of the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, after the start of the first bonus game or the second bonus game, a special effect execution is performed to execute a specific effect at least until the game ball enters the ball entering means. A game machine G3 comprising: means, wherein the suggestion effect execution means is configured to execute an effect suggesting a type of the bonus game as a result of the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exerted. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in a period from when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is started to when the game ball enters at least the ball entering means. As a result of the specific effect, the effect that suggests the type of the bonus game is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

  As a result, since it is possible to show a series of effects by the specific effect and the effect that suggests the type of bonus game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for displaying dynamic display of identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display means Identification information capable of determining one piece of identification information from among a plurality of pieces of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information as the identification information dynamically displayed by The identification information determination means determines the specific determination result by the determination by the determination means, and the first identification information when the first bonus game is determined by the type determination means. The game machine G4 is characterized in that the first identification information or the second identification information is determined when the second bonus game is determined.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display means displays the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. One piece of identification information is selected from among a plurality of pieces of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information as identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means It is determined by the determining means. The determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, and when the first bonus game is determined by the type determination means, the first identification information is determined by the identification information determination means. On the other hand, when the second bonus game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determination means.

  Thereby, it is possible to confirm the dynamic display of the identification information in anticipation of the display of the second identification information which is determined only by the advantageous second bonus game by the dynamic display. In addition, by configuring the first identification information to be displayed also in the case of the second bonus game, when the first identification information is displayed, the player's expectation for the second bonus game can be maintained. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine G4, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the dynamic display means, The type of the suggestion effect includes a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and the first identification information is the second indication information. A game machine G5 characterized in that at least a second suggestion effect which is changed to identification information is provided.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the dynamic display means, the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. The first indication effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information and the first identification information is changed to the second identification information in the type of the indication effect At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

  As a result, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information, there is an effect that it is possible to play the game in anticipation of the execution of the second suggestion effect.

  The gaming machine G5 includes suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not the suggestion effect is to be executed when the first benefit game or the second benefit game is determined by the type determination means. The identification information determination means determines the first identification information based on the fact that the suggestion effect is determined to be performed by the suggestion effect execution determination means, and the suggestion effect execution means is the type determination means The first bonus game is determined by the first game, and the second game is determined by the type determining means when the first effect game is determined to execute the suggested effect. A gaming machine G6 for executing the second suggested effect when it is determined that the suggested effect is to be executed by the suggested effect execution determining means.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is determined by the type determination unit, it is determined by the suggested effect execution determination unit whether or not to execute the suggested effect. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determination means based on the fact that the suggestion effect is determined to be performed by the suggestion effect execution determination means. When the first identification information is determined by the type determination means, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is performed by the suggestion effect execution determination means, the first suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. On the other hand, when the second bonus game is determined by the type determination means, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the suggestion effect execution determination means, the second effect game is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

  As a result, since the second suggestion effect is executed only when the second bonus game is determined, there is an effect that the game can be played in expectation of the second suggestion effect being executed.

  In the gaming machine G6, the suggestion effect execution determination means executes the suggestion effect when the second bonus game is determined than when the first benefit game is determined by the type determination means. A game machine G7 characterized in that the rate of discrimination is high.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G6, the method in which the second bonus game is determined is more effective than the case in which the first bonus game is determined by the type determining unit Since the proportion determined to execute the suggestion effect is high, there is an effect that the sense of expectation for the second bonus game can be improved when the suggestion effect is started.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means in the display means, and its dynamic display A period of dynamic display of identification information indicating the specific determination result performed by the execution means, and a period from when the bonus game is started until at least the variable means is changed to the first position Specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect, the suggested effect execution means performing, as a result of the specific effect, a suggested effect that suggests the type of the bonus game Gaming machine G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means and the period from when the bonus game is started until at least the variable means is biased by two positions. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means over the period. As a result of the specific effect, the suggested effect indicating the type of the bonus game is executed by the suggested effect execution means.

  As a result, since it is possible to show a series of effects by the specific effect and the effect that suggests the type of bonus game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Feature H group> (Varying the predictability of occurrence / non-presence of retention contingencies depending on the jackpot type)
Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, and bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result, As the type of the bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means, the type determination of determining the type of 1 from the plurality of types including at least the first bonus game and the second bonus game different from the first bonus game A first variable mode and a first variable mode based on the determination result by the means, the variable means variable in a predetermined variable mode, and the determination result by the determination means being different from the specific determination result. A first variable control means for changing the variable means in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a second variable mode different from the mode, and the specific discrimination result determined by the discrimination means And second variable control means for changing the variable means in a third variable mode including at least a specific variable mode which looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode, and the first bonus game The first variable control means sets a first variable state in which the variable means can be easily changed in the first variable mode by the first variable control means until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied after the operation ends, and the second benefit Between the end of the game and the establishment of the specific condition, variable state setting means for setting a second variable state in which the variable means is more easily changed in the second variable mode than in the first variable state , A game machine H1 characterized by comprising.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of per-classes having different numbers of rounds, and some are trying to improve the persuasiveness by varying the game value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since it is notified that the win has been made when the win has been made, the type of the win is also reported. It would be like a task of digesting a hit, and the game might be monotonous. Also, among conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to identify whether it is in a hit state or a small hit, which is a kind of out-of-round, from the effect mode or the opening / closing operation of a specific winning opening. There is also known a gaming machine that has been configured, and a gaming machine that can be expected to have a hit even after the end of the hit game is also known. However, in such a gaming machine, it takes too long to determine whether a hit or a small hit has occurred, which may impair the player's interest in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. Based on the determination result by the determination means that the specific determination result is obtained, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. As a type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game executing means, the type of one of the plurality of types including the first bonus game and the second bonus game different from the first bonus game by the type determination means It is determined. A plurality of variable aspects including at least a first variable aspect and a second variable aspect different from the first variable aspect based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminator makes the outlier discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result The variable means is made variable by the first variable control means in any one of the variable modes. The second variable control means includes the variable means in the third variable mode including at least the specific variable mode which looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode based on the specific judgment result by the judgment by the judgment means. It is variable. Between the end of the first bonus game and the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the first variable control means can easily change the variable means in the first variable mode by the first variable control means using the variable state setting means. It is set. On the other hand, between the end of the second bonus game and the establishment of the specific condition, the variable state setting means sets the second variable state in which the variable means is more easily changed in the second variable mode than the first variable state. Be done.

  As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable aspect of the variable means between the case where the first bonus game is ended after the end of the first bonus game and the case where the result of the first special game is the specific judgment result. Until then, it can be difficult to identify whether the bonus game is executed from the variable aspect of the variable means. On the other hand, if the result of the removal judgment after the end of the second bonus game is reached, the second variable mode is set, so the player relatively identifies from the variable mode of the variable means whether or not the result of the removal judgment is reached. It will be easier. Therefore, since the easiness of identifying the result of out-of-focus determination before the specific condition is established can be varied according to the type of the bonus game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, the game ball is provided with a ball entering means capable of entering the ball, and the variable means is a first position where the game ball can enter the ball into the ball entering means, and the game ball than the first position. Is variable to the second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and in the first variable aspect, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period. The second variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of a second period different from the first period. A game machine H2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is configured in a variable mode in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period, and the second variable mode is a second mode different from the first period. The variable means is configured to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of a period.

  Thereby, the player can easily identify whether it is the first variable mode or the second variable mode by confirming the interval until the variable means is changed to the first position. There is.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the determination means performs a first determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A second determination unit that executes a second determination based on the establishment, and the first variable control unit is configured to execute the second determination based on the result of the determination by the first determination that the second determination is made. The variable means is varied in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode, and the second variable control means is the first discrimination means. A game machine H3 characterized in that the variable means is made variable in the third variable mode on the basis of the fact that the specific judgment result is obtained by the judgment according to the above.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The second determination is executed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. First variable control according to any one of a plurality of variable aspects including at least a first variable aspect and a second variable aspect based on the fact that the first discrimination means makes the discrimination result out of the discrimination. The variable means is made variable by the means. The second variable control means changes the variable means in the third variable mode based on the fact that the first judgment means makes a specific judgment result.

  Thereby, according to the type of the bonus game, the variable aspect of the variable means in the case where the judgment by the first judgment means results in the separation judgment being variable, the first judgment means until the specific condition is established. Each time the determination is performed, it is possible to play the game paying attention to the variable aspect of the variable means.

  In the gaming machine H3, the type determining means determines the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the result of the specific determination in the second determination by the second determining means. A game machine H4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H3, the type of bonus game to be executed based on the result of the specific determination in the second determination by the second determination means is determined by the type determination means Since it is determined, it is possible to play the game paying attention to whether the first bonus game is determined or the second bonus game is determined when the second determination by the second determination means is executed. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is more easily established than the second determination condition from the end of the bonus game to the establishment of the specific condition. A gaming machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is satisfied more than the second determination condition from the end of the bonus game until the specific condition is established. Since it becomes easy, it is effective in the ability to play a game paying attention by the variable aspect of a variable means until specific conditions are satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines H3 to H5, a first ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction can enter, and a second ball being fired in a second direction different from the first direction The second ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball can enter and the game ball fired in the first direction are provided at a position where it is easy to enter, and predetermined based on the game ball entering the ball The game ball enters the ball from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the state of the bonus ball entering means to which the bonus is awarded and the state of the bonus ball entering means, the bonus game being started A variable control means for changing the second state possible a predetermined number of times, and the first determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, The second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means Gaming machine H6-and wherein the the at it.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction can enter, and the game ball fired in the second direction different from the first direction can enter the first position. 2 ball entry means are provided. At a position where the game ball fired in the first direction is likely to enter the ball, there is provided a benefit ball entering means which is provided with a predetermined benefit based on the game ball having entered the ball. The state of the benefit entering means is varied by the variable control means from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter on the basis of the start of the bonus game to the second state in which the game ball can enter the game a predetermined number of times. The first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means Is established.

  As a result, by aiming the bonus ball entering means during firing of the bonus game and firing the game ball, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the first ball hitting means as well. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily established when the bonus game is executed.

  In the gaming machine H6, first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first discrimination information acquiring means The first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means is provided with a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the first discrimination information as the upper limit of the predetermined information number, and the particular condition is the discrimination information at the end of the bonus game. A game machine H7 characterized by being established based on execution of determination based on all the first determination information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, the first discrimination information acquisition means acquires the first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means. The first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means is stored by the discrimination information storage means with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit. The specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the discrimination based on all the first discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means at the end of the bonus game is executed.

  As a result, the first determination information acquired during the execution of the bonus game is stored in the determination information storage unit, so that the first determination can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine H7, a plurality of gaming states at least including a first gaming state and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game The game condition determination means determines the game condition of 1, and the type determination means determines the game state as a type of a benefit game to be executed based on the result of the specific determination in the first determination. The first type determining means in which the ratio for determining the third bonus game in which the first gaming state is determined by the determining means is higher than the ratio for determining the types of other bonus games, and the specification in the second determination A second type in which one type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least the first bonus game and the second bonus game as a bonus game type to be executed based on the determination result of Decision means, The game state determination means determines the second game state as a game state after the end of the bonus game when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is reached. A game machine H8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the following effects are exerted. That is, as a game state after the end of the bonus game, there is a first game state and one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Is determined by the gaming state determination means. As a type of bonus game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the first determination, the third type bonus game in which the first gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means is determined by the first type determination means The rate of being played is higher than the rate at which other types of bonus games are determined. As a type of the benefit game to be executed based on the result of the specific determination in the second determination, the type of the first among the plurality of types including at least a first benefit game and a second benefit game is the first 2 Determined by the type determination means. When it becomes the first bonus game or the second bonus game, the second game mode is determined by the game mode determining means as the game mode after the end of the bonus game.

  Thereby, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination, the ratio in which the first gaming state is determined after the end of the bonus game is high, so the first determination stored in the determination information storage means during the execution of the bonus game Based on the information, it is possible to cause the game to be performed in hope that all the first determinations executed after the end of the bonus game will be out-of-range determination results. As a result, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that make it possible to avoid having a specific determination result, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Characteristics I group> (Measures of occurrence of pending party vary according to the jackpot type)
A first determination unit that executes determination based on establishment of a first determination condition; second determination unit that executes determination based on establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition; A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination by the first determining means or the determination result by the second determining means, and the bonus game executing means As the type of the bonus game to be executed, the first bonus game and the first bonus game, the discrimination by the second discrimination means from the end of the bonus game until the specific condition is established. The first gaming state as a type determination means for determining the type of one of the plurality of bonus games from among the plurality of at least the second bonus game that is likely to be a specific determination result, and the gaming state after the bonus game is over And its 1 game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the 1 game state, wherein the first benefit game and the second benefit game are either Also, as a game state after the end of the bonus game, the setting ratio of the first game state is higher than that of the second game state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that shifts to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of per-classes having different numbers of rounds, and some are trying to improve the persuasiveness by varying the game value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417). Also, among conventional gaming machines, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, it is advantageous to make the gaming state given after hitting different or to make the number of winning balls obtainable in each round different, etc. Some have a difference in degree. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the determination is performed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. 2 Discrimination is executed by the discrimination means. Based on the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means that a specific determination result is obtained, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. As a type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game executing means, the first bonus game and the first bonus game, discrimination by the second discriminator between the end of the bonus game and the establishment of the specific condition The type of one benefit game is selected by the type determination means from among a plurality of the second benefit games that are likely to result in a specific determination result. As a game state after the end of the bonus game, one game state is set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of first game states and a second game state different from the first game state. . In both the first bonus game and the second bonus game, the setting ratio of the second gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game.

  Thus, depending on whether the first benefit game or the second benefit game is to be performed, the possibility of a specific determination result being determined by the second determination unit varies until the specific condition is established, There is an effect that it is possible to play the game paying attention to the type of the bonus game determined by the type determination means.

  In the game I1, the type determination means includes a plurality of at least the first benefit game, the second benefit game, and a third benefit game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the other types of benefit games. The type of the bonus game from 1 to 1 is determined, and the third bonus game is determined by the second determination means rather than the determination by the first determination means when the specific determination result is obtained. A game machine I2 characterized in that the ratio determined by the type determination means is high.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the type of the one bonus game among the plurality including at least the first bonus game, the second bonus game, and the third bonus game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the other bonus game types is the type determination means Determined by The rate at which the third bonus game is determined by the type determination means is higher when the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result than the determination by the first determination means.

  As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means, the rate at which the disadvantageous third bonus game is determined is high, and it is hoped that the determination by the second determination means does not result in the specific determination result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform the game expecting to become the first benefit game, rather than becoming the second benefit game that is likely to be a specific determination result by the determination by the second determination means.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the first gaming state may be determined by the first determining means or determined by the second determining means, and the probability that the specific determination result will be the second gaming state The second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition during the period from the end of the second benefit game to the establishment of the specific condition. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first gaming state is configured such that the probability of being a specific discrimination result is higher than that of the second gaming state when the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed. . Between the end of the second benefit game and the establishment of the specific condition, the second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition.

  As a result, in the first gaming state, the probability of being a specific determination result is higher than in the second gaming state, so it becomes easy to become a bonus game continuously at relatively short intervals. As a result, when the first gaming state is reached, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means Discrimination information storage means capable of storing discrimination information with a predetermined number of information as the upper limit, and based on the fact that one piece of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means And an erasing unit that erases the one discrimination information from the discrimination information storage unit, and the specific condition is that the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage unit is zero. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being established based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information acquisition means acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means. Discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit. Based on the fact that one piece of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, the discrimination information of the one is erased from the discrimination information storage means by the erasing means. The specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes zero.

  As a result, since it is easy for the second determination means to make a specific determination result until the number of information in the determination information becomes 0, the game is played by paying attention to the number of information stored in the determination information storage means. It has the effect of being able to

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, a first ball entry means disposed at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction can enter, and a second ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction A second ball entering means disposed at a position where the game ball can enter, and the first determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means The second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the second bonus game starts with the bonus game A game machine I5 characterized in that it is easier for the player to take advantage of shooting the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction during at least a predetermined period later.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first ball entering means is disposed at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball. The second ball entering means is disposed at a position where the game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. While the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, the second determination condition is that the game ball enters the second ball entry means It is established based on In the second bonus game, it is more advantageous for the player to fire the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction at least for a predetermined period after the start of the bonus game.

  Thereby, when it becomes the second bonus game, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entering means by firing the game ball in the second direction in a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the second determination condition is easily established after the end of the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine I5, the gaming ball fired in the first direction is disposed at a position where the game ball can enter, and the first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and the state where the game ball can not enter the ball The variable ball entering means and the gaming ball fired in the second direction are disposed at a position where the ball can be pitched, and can be varied between the state where the gaming ball can be pitched and the state where the gaming ball is difficult to enter. 2) variable ball entering means, and benefit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means; [2] A game machine I6 characterized in that the variable ball entering means is variably put into a state in which the game ball can enter the ball at least during the predetermined period while the second bonus game is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first variable ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction can enter and the state where the game ball can enter and the state where the game ball can not enter the ball is difficult to enter It is done. A second variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter the ball, and a state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a state where the game ball can not enter the ball are difficult to enter There is. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, a predetermined bonus is awarded by the bonus award means. The second variable ball entry means is variably put into a state in which the gaming ball can be pitched for at least a predetermined period during execution of the second score game.

  Thus, in a predetermined period of time during execution of the second benefit game, it is possible to cause the player who wants to obtain a predetermined benefit to fire the game ball in the second direction. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be entered into the second entry means during the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine I6, the first variable ball entering device is characterized in that the game ball is variably put into a state capable of being balled in at least the predetermined period during the execution of the first bonus game. A game machine I7.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I6, the first variable entering means changes the state where the gaming ball can enter the ball during the execution of the first score game at least for a predetermined period. Thus, in a predetermined period of time during the execution of the first benefit game, it is possible to cause the player who wants to obtain the predetermined benefit to fire the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entry means during the predetermined period during the execution of the first bonus game.

  Discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means in any of the game machines I5 to I7, and The discrimination information storage means is capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit, and the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction for the predetermined period. In this case, the gaming machine I8 is a period of a length in which the second discrimination information at least the predetermined number of information is acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I5 to I7, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means is stored by the discrimination information storage means with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit. The predetermined period is configured to have a length such that at least a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information is acquired by the discrimination information storage means when the game ball is continuously displayed in the second direction.

  Thereby, when it becomes a 2nd privilege game, it is effective in the ability to make the discrimination information store information of the upper limit to the discrimination information storage means surely.

  In the gaming machine I8, the game ball launched in the second direction is a first flow path provided with the second ball entry means, and a second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means A game machine I9 comprising distribution means which can be distributed to either of the above.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I8, the gaming ball fired in the second direction is a first flow path provided with a second entering means, and a second variable entering means Since it is distributed by the distributing means to either of the provided second flow paths, the game ball fired in the second direction may be biased to the second ball entering means, or vice versa, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the entering of the ball into the variable entering means.

  The gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9. A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9 A game machine Z2 characterized by Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that it is a combination of a slot machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 1st ball entrance (1st ball entry means)
203b 2nd special symbol holding ball storage area (discrimination information storage means)
640 2nd ball entrance (2nd ball entry means)
S207 erasing means S220 bonus game executing means S305 first discriminating means, second discriminating means S306 type deciding means S408 discrimination information acquiring means S1110 gaming state setting means

Claims (5)

First determination means for performing determination based on establishment of the first determination condition;
A second determination unit that executes determination based on establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition;
Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the first determination means or the determination result by the second determination means as a specific determination result;
As a type of the bonus game to be executed by the bonus game executing means, the first bonus game and the second bonus game, the second bonus game is performed until the specific condition is established after the bonus game is completed. Type determination means for determining one of the plurality of bonus game types from among a plurality of second bonus games that are likely to be the specific determination result by the determination by the determination means;
Game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state as a game state after the end of the bonus game; , And
The setting ratio of the first gaming state is higher than the second gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game, as the first bonus game and the second bonus game. A game machine characterized by The type determination means is one of the plurality of types including at least the first benefit game, the second benefit game, and a third benefit game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the other types of the benefit game. Determines the type of bonus game,
In the third bonus game, the ratio determined by the type determination unit is higher than the determination by the first determination unit when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that In the first gaming state, the probability that the specific discrimination result is obtained when the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed is higher than the second gaming state.
Between the end of the second bonus game and the establishment of the specific condition, the second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2. Discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information;
An erasing unit that erases the first discrimination information from the discrimination information storage unit based on the fact that the first discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage unit is used for discrimination by the second discrimination unit; Equipped with
The information processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes zero. Of gaming machines. First ball entering means disposed at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball;
And second ball entering means disposed at a position where the game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter.
The first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means,
The second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means,
In the second benefit game, it is more advantageous for the player to be more advantageous to fire the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction, at least for a predetermined period after the start of the bonus game. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that:

Images